JP6504503B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

  Conventionally, when a player inserts game media such as medals and coins (hereinafter referred to as "insert operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are displayed respectively. The rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the surface starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result A so-called pachislot machine, which is provided with a benefit according to the situation, is known.

  In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, random numbers are extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as "internal winning combination"), and drive control of the stepping motor is performed. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In recent years, referring to the point selection table while the bonus (for example, BB) is activated, the points are integrated by lottery based on the internal winning combination, and the procedure of the stop operation which becomes advantageous for the player after the bonus ends according to the accumulated points. There is known a gaming machine for notifying the user (Patent Document 1).

JP, 2008-7969, A

  However, in the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, since the points indicating whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player is only determined by the lottery based on the internal winning combination, the bonus operation is performed. There was a problem that the game inside became monotonous.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is possible to perform a more diverse lottery regarding lottery of whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player. The purpose is to provide a machine.

  In the present invention, symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of lines, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 93) for determining an internal winning combination The internal lottery process), the symbol variation start control means (for example, the reel rotation start process and the reel control process by the main CPU 93) for starting the variation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, and displayed on the symbol display means The fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, the reel stop control processing and the reel control process by the main CPU 93) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol and the symbol fluctuation stop control means Based on the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, bonus combination) being displayed on the symbol display means, the special gaming state ( For example, special game state control means (for example, bonus operation check processing by the main CPU 93 and winning operation command reception processing by the sub CPU 102) to be controlled to battle CZ) and procedures of stop operation advantageous for the player are informed. Advantage game state control means (for example, sub CPU 102) to control to a specific advantage game state (for example, ART game), and advantage game state lottery means (for example, to draw lottery whether or not to shift to the specific advantage game state) The sub-CPU 102), and the advantageous gaming state lottery means determines the internal winning determined by the internal winning combination determining means during a predetermined lottery period (for example, a period in which the number of lottery times is less than "5"). Lottery whether or not to update a specific numerical value (for example, HP) based on the role (for example, the lottery in step S 504 of FIG. 84) And, as a result of the lottery, when the specific numerical value becomes a specific update result (for example, HP is "0" or less), it is determined to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state, and the predetermined lottery Based on the number of times a predetermined small winning combination has been determined by the internal winning combination determination means (for example, the number of times the lottery is allowed) in a period, it is determined whether or not to add the number of games in the specific advantageous gaming state In the special gaming state, the number of times the predetermined small winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means becomes a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). It is a gaming machine characterized by ending based on the event.

  Further, in the present invention, the special game state control means is based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is established in the special game state (for example, the bonus end number counter becomes less than “0”). The special game state is ended by the special game state control means after the special game state is ended and the advantageous game state lottery means decides to shift to the specific advantageous game state in the special game state. To determine whether to add the number of games in the specific advantageous gaming state based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means (for example, determination in step S518 of FIG. 84). It is a game machine as described above characterized by the above.

  Further, in the present invention, when the number of games in the specific advantageous gaming state is added based on the number of times the predetermined small winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means by the advantageous gaming state lottery means ( For example, based on the determination in step S519 in FIG. 84, if the number of added ART games is added) and the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the number of games of the specific advantageous gaming state is In the case of being added (for example, when the number of added ART games is added by the determination of step S518 in FIG. 84), the same display is performed, and the number of games of the specific advantageous gaming state is added The gaming machine according to the above, further comprising: notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for notifying the user.

  Further, in the present invention, in the special game state, the advantageous game state lottery means is further determined continuously by the specific winning combination (for example, replay role) by the internal winning combination determining means during the predetermined lottery period. It is a game machine as described above characterized by performing lottery of whether or not to update the specific numerical value based on the number of times (for example, the number of times of continuous replay).

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to perform a more diverse lottery regarding lottery for judging whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player (for example, the transition lottery to ART game). Can.

It is an explanatory view explaining a functional flow in a game machine of this embodiment. It is a perspective view showing an example of appearance composition in a game machine of this embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure in the game machine of this embodiment, and the state which closed the middle door. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure in the game machine of this embodiment, and the state which opened the middle door. It is an explanatory view showing the inside of the cabinet in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing the back side of the front door in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing a control system in a game machine of this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a main control circuit in a game machine of this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a sub control circuit in a game machine of this embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the game state in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | positioning table memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows the symbol code table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the bonus in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the replay combination in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the small winning combination etc. in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for general game states in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for BB gaming states in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination determination table for small part and replay in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal-winning-combination determination table for bonus in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship of the stop operation order and internal winning combination with respect to the internal winning combination in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination storing area in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display combination storing area in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol code storage area in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the carry over combination storage area in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the game state flag storage area in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement stop button storage area in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the pressing order storage area in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the PBB middle added ART game number lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the battle CZ character lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction success / failure lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value lottery table for character A in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value lottery table for character B in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value lottery table for character C in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flip continuous HP subtraction success / failure lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value random-selection table | surface of the lip continuous time character A in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value random-selection table | surface of the lip continuous time character B in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value random-selection table | surface of the continuous-rip character C in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number ART game number addition success / failure lottery table at the time of ART winning during battle CZ in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the ART game number random selection | lottery table at the time of ART election during battle CZ in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the success / failure lottery table of ART game number addition during battle CZ in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the battle CZ middle additional ART game number lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the card acquisition success lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the card type lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flip continuous card | curd acquisition success lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flip continuous card type lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the success / failure lottery table of the number of ART games added normally during BB in the gaming machine of this embodiment. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a lottery table for the number of ART games for normal game addition BB in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the card remainder extra time ART game number lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in item CZ in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction HP success / failure lottery table in ART in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value lottery table in ART in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction success / recession lottery table in the lip continuous time ART in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP subtraction value lottery table in ART for lip continuous enemies A to C in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the HP in HP subtraction value lottery table for ART in the continual enemy D in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the bell winning frequency lottery table of ART game number addition lottery in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the success / failure lottery table of ART game number addition success at the time of the bell winning frequency arrival in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition ART game number random selection | lottery table at the time of the bell prize number attainment in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the ART during mode transition lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the inside in a normal mode transition lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the ART end time mode transition lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows BB number at the time of BB election in the gaming machine of this embodiment, and a game number lottery table. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of the power activation performed in the main control processing shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the medal reception / start check process performed in the main control process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery process performed in the main control processing shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the state management process performed in the main control processing shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the external signal output management process performed in the state management process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus end check process performed in the main control process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus operation check process performed in the main control process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption processing by control of main CPU in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the input port check process performed in the interruption process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the communication data transmission process performed in the interruption process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the power activation process of sub CPU in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp | ramp control task started in the power-on process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the sound control task started in the power-on process shown in FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task started in the mother task started by the power on processing shown in FIG. 74. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing command analysis processing executed in the main board communication task shown in FIG. 77. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an effect content determination process executed in the command analysis process shown in FIG. 78; FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a start command reception process executed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 79; FIG. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing an ART in-game processing that is executed in the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 80; FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an additional BB in progress process executed in the ART in-game process shown in FIG. 81; FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing an ART game end check process executed in the ART in-game process shown in FIG. 81. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a battle CZ in-progress process which is executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 80. FIG. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing a process during normal BB executed in the start command reception process shown in FIG. 80. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in the item CZ performed in the process at the time of start command reception shown in FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing in-game processing which is executed in the start command reception processing shown in FIG. 80; FIG. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing a winning operation command reception process carried out in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 79; FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a bonus end command reception process executed in the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 79; FIG.

  A pachislot machine which is one specific example of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1, the main configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described.

[Function flow of Pachislot machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the respective units shown in FIG. 1 execute necessary processing, and the functions carried by each unit are exhibited to enable the player to execute the game.

<Input operation detection means>
The insertion operation detection means detects an insertion operation of game media such as medals and coins by the player. When the insertion operation of a predetermined number of game media (for example, three medals) is detected, the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means described later is permitted. In addition, in the symbol display means described later, a predetermined pay line is activated (hereinafter, the activated pay line is referred to as an "effective line"). In the present embodiment, the selector 66 for detecting the insertion of medals by the player and the BET switch 77 for detecting the operation of the BET button 22 by the player constitute an insertion operation detection means. The types of game media that can be detected are not limited to medals, and include coins, tokens, game balls, electromagnetic game media having the same value as these, and the like.

<Start operation detection means>
The start operation detection means detects a start operation by the player. When the start operation is detected, variable display of symbols by symbol display means described later is started. In addition, a random number value used when an internal winning combination determining means described later determines an internal winning combination is extracted from within a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535). Further, the effect random number used when the effect control means described later determines the effect is extracted from within a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 32767). In the present embodiment, the start switch 79 for detecting the operation of the start lever 23 by the player constitutes start operation detection means. The type, number, and numerical range of the random number to be extracted are not limited to the above, and the random number of the number required in the game can be extracted from within the predetermined numerical range. .

<Internal winning combination determination means>
The internal winning combination determination means draws a lottery based on the extracted random number value, and determines an internal winning combination from among a plurality of predetermined combinations. That is, by the determination of the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols permitted to be displayed on the activated line is determined. In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 which executes the internal lottery process based on the extracted random number values with reference to various tables constitutes an internal winning combination determining means. The types of combinations of symbols include those related to "winning" in which the player is given a benefit such as payout of medals, activation of replay (replay), activation of bonus, etc., and other so-called "loss" The ones concerned are provided.

  Further, the pachislot machine 1 can perform control such that the progress of the game is stopped (the game operation of the player is invalidated). Such control is referred to as "locking" (or "freezing"). For convenience, the control to stop the progress of the game executed at the start of the game is called "lock at the start of the game", and the control to stop the progress of the game executed at the end of the game is "lock at the end of game" Call. That is, "lock at game start" is control in which the progress of the game is stopped in the sense that the operation to the stop button is not effective in a predetermined period after the start lever is operated, The “game end lock” means that the progress of the game is stopped in the sense that the operation to the bet button or the operation to the start lever is not effective in a predetermined period after the stop button is operated. Control. Of course, the trigger for “locking” is not limited to the above, and for example, after the start lever is operated and one of the stop buttons is operated, the subsequent operation is considered valid in a predetermined period. Control may be performed.

  Here, the internal winning combination determining means performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value, and can determine whether or not to "lock" instead of the internal winning combination or together with the internal winning combination. In this case, a plurality of random number values are extracted, an internal winning combination is determined based on one of the random number values, and whether or not to perform "lock" is determined based on the other one random number value. It may be

<Symbol display means>
The symbol display means variably displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns. That is, when the start operation is detected by the start operation detection means, the variable display of symbols is started, and when the stop control is executed by the stop control means described later, the variable display of symbols is ended. In the present embodiment, the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the reel display window 4 constitute a symbol display means. The symbol display means is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a symbol image display means (for example, an image display device) that variably displays a plurality of symbol images in a plurality of lines.

<Stop operation detection means>
The stop operation detection means detects a stop operation by the player. When the stop operation is detected, the fluctuation display of the symbols by the symbol display means is stopped by the stop control means described later. In the present embodiment, the stop switch board 80 for detecting the operation of the stop button 19L, 19C, 19R by the player constitutes stop operation detecting means.

  Note that the first stop operation is performed first when the reels are rotated while all reels are rotating, and the second stop operation after the first stop operation is performed after the second stop operation and the second stop operation. The stop operation performed is called the third stop operation.

<Stop control means>
The stop control means controls the stop of the fluctuation display of the symbols in the symbol display means. That is, when the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means, the variation display of the symbols in the symbol display means is stopped based on the stop control information set according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means Control. In the present embodiment, when the player operates the stop button 19L, 19C, 19R, it refers to various stop control information and executes reel stop control processing for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The main control circuit 91 constitutes a stop control means.

  Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) after the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols moving with the rotation of the reel within the prescribed time is referred to as the “number of sliding symbols”. If the prescribed period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is determined to be four symbols, and if the prescribed period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is determined to be one symbol. The maximum number of sliding symbols is not limited to these, and can be set as appropriate.

  The stop control means is configured to display the combination of the symbols as much as possible along the effective line using the prescribed time for the combination of symbols for which display is permitted according to the determination result of the internal winning combination. Stop the reel rotation in the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces.

  On the other hand, according to the determination result of the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols not permitted to be displayed is such that the maximum sliding piece is not displayed along the effective line using the above-mentioned prescribed time. Stop spinning the reel in a range of numbers.

  Further, the stop control means is for changing the combination of symbols displayed in accordance with a predetermined stop operation order (for example, the order in which a plurality of stop buttons are operated) the determined internal winning combination At this time, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel with reference to the predetermined stop operation order.

<Winning determination means>
The prize determination means determines whether there is a prize according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. That is, when the variable display of symbols is stopped by the stop control means, the winning or non-winning of the winning combination is determined based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line. In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 configured to execute a prize search process based on a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means with reference to a symbol combination table etc. constitutes a prize determination means.

<Meal granting means>
The profit granting means grants a profit according to the combination of the winning symbols when it is determined by the prize judging means that there is a prize. That is, in accordance with the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, the corresponding benefit is given to the player. In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 that executes medal payout processing and the like based on the result of the winning search processing constitutes a profit giving means. In the case where the benefit to be provided is to be provided by the control of the sub control circuit 101, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a profit giving means.

  Here, as the profit provided by the profit giving means, medal payout, game media of the same quantity as the current game are automatically inserted, and the inside of the operation of the re-play and the re-play in which the game can be played again Operation of replay high probability state (replay time) where the winning probability of winning combination is high, activation of special gaming state (bonus) where probability of winning of internal winning combination related to payout of medals is high, operation of stopping suitable for the player By notifying the procedure of the operation of the specific gaming state (assist time) in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the payout of the medal is high can be mentioned. The benefits provided by the profit giving means are not limited to this.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1, when the insertion operation of the player is detected by the insertion operation detection unit and the start operation of the player is detected by the start operation detection unit, the internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determination unit. Is determined, and variable display of symbols by the symbol display means is started. Then, when the player's stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means, and the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means is the prize determination means When it is determined that the combination of symbols related to winning is determined, the profit giving means gives a profit according to the combination of the marks. A series of flows as described above are performed as one game (unit game) in a pachislot machine.

<Effect control means>
The effect control means performs lottery based on the extracted effect random number value and other information (for example, information related to the internal winning combination), and determines one to be executed this time out of a plurality of types of effects. Further, the effect control means controls an effect execution means to be described later so that the determined effect is appropriately executed. In the present embodiment, with reference to various tables, the subsidiary control circuit 101 which determines the effect contents based on at least the extracted effect random number values and executes the effect according to the determined effect contents is effect control Configure the means. In addition, the above-mentioned "lock" can also be considered to be an aspect of the effect. In this case, the main control circuit 91 constitutes effect control means.

  Further, when the predetermined notification condition is satisfied, the effect control means determines an effect for notifying the player of information necessary for the game (for example, information on the stop operation order and information on the game history). In this case, the effect control means can also be referred to as notification control means.

<Effect execution means>
The effect execution means executes the effect determined by the effect control means. In other words, it means various devices used for effects such as a display device or lamp that performs visual effects that appeal to the eye, a speaker that performs visual effects that affect the sense of hearing, and an effect button that performs effects that appeal to the sense of touch. In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 11, the LED 85, and the speakers 42, 58, 64, 65L, and 65R constitute effect performing means. The effect executing means is not limited to these, and may be, for example, a movable body (character) provided at a position visible from the front side of the pachislot machine 1, or a plurality of reels (for example, The presentation may be performed by variably displaying the reels 3L, 3C, 3R) in a representation mode different from the variation display aspect of the normal symbol.

  Further, the effect execution means, when the effect control means has determined the effect for notifying the player of information necessary for the game (for example, information on the stop operation order and information on the game history), The notification of the information is executed to the player. In this case, the effect executing means can also be called informing means.

[Structure of pachislot machine]
Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Appearance structure>
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  The exterior body 2 of the pachi-slot machine 1 has a cabinet 2a for accommodating a reel, a circuit board and the like, and a front door 2b attached to the cabinet 2a in an openable / closable manner. Moreover, the handle 7 is provided in the both sides | surfaces of the cabinet 2a. The handle 7 is a concave portion which is used to carry the pachi-slot machine 1 during transportation.

  Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided side by side. Hereinafter, the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R are also referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R has a cylindrical reel body and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are drawn at equal intervals along the circumferential direction.

  An upper panel unit 10 and a liquid crystal display device 11 are provided above the center of the front door 2b. The upper panel unit 10 forms an upper portion of the front door 2b. The upper panel unit 10 has a light source, and executes effects by the light emitted from the light source. The liquid crystal display device 11 is disposed on the lower side of the upper panel unit 10, and performs effects by displaying an image.

  A pedestal 12 is formed at the center of the front door 2b. The pedestal portion 12 is provided with a symbol display area 4 and various devices to be operated by the player.

  The symbol display area 4 is disposed on the front side overlapping the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front, and is provided corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The symbol display area 4 serves as a display window, and is configured to be able to transmit the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind it. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 4 is also referred to as a reel display window 4.

  When rotation of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 is stopped, the upper, middle and lower stages in the frame of the plural types of symbols of the respective reels 3L, 3C and 3R One symbol (3 in total) is displayed in each area of. In addition, one or more lines each of which is a combination of any of three areas consisting of an upper stage, a middle stage and a lower stage facing the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R of the reel display window 4 are defined as effective lines. It will be done. In the present embodiment, a line (center line) formed by combining middle regions facing the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R is defined as an effective line.

  The reel display window 4 is formed by a frame member 13 provided on the pedestal 12. The frame member 13 has a reel display window 4, an information display window 14, and a stop button mounting portion 15.

  The information display window 14 is provided continuously to the lower part of the reel display window 4 and opens upward. That is, the reel display window 4 and the information display window 14 are formed as one continuous opening. The information display window 14 and the reel display window 4 are covered by a transparent window cover 16.

  The window cover 16 is disposed on the inner surface side of the frame member 13 and can not be removed from the front surface side of the front door 2b. Further, the frame member 13 has a sheet placement portion 17 facing the opening of the information display window 14 with the window cover 16 interposed therebetween. Then, between the sheet placement unit 17 and the window cover 16, a sheet member (information sheet) in which information about the game is described is disposed. Therefore, the information sheet is covered by the window cover 16 having a smooth surface without unevenness and gaps.

  The window cover 16 constituting the mounting portion of the information sheet can not be removed from the front side of the front door 2b, and is a smooth surface without unevenness and gaps. Therefore, using the mounting portion of the information sheet, a pachislot machine is used. It is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the inside of 1. The exchange of the information sheet will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the reel display window 4 and the information display window 14 are formed as one continuous opening. However, the information display window according to the gaming machine of the present invention may be provided below the reel display window, and may not be continuous with the reel display window. That is, the reel display window 4 and the information display window 14 may be formed as two openings aligned in the vertical direction.

  The stop button attachment portion 15 is provided below the information display window 14 and is formed in a plane facing the front. The stop button mounting portion 15 is provided with a through hole through which the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R pass. The stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are associated with the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, respectively, and are provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are also referred to as the left stop button 19L, the middle stop button 19C, and the right stop button 19R, respectively.

  The stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R show an example of operation means to be operated by the player. Further, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a medal insertion slot 21, a BET button 22, and a start lever 23 as operation means to be operated by the player.

  The medal insertion slot 21 is provided to receive medals dropped from the outside by the player. The medals received in the medal insertion slot 21 will be inserted in one game with the predetermined number as a upper limit, and it will be possible to deposit the number exceeding the predetermined number inside the pachislot machine 1 (So-called credit function).

  The BET button 22 is provided to determine the number of medals to be inserted into one game from the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. The start lever 23 is provided to start the rotation of all the reels (3L, 3C, 3R).

  A 7-segment display 24 formed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 when viewed from the front. The 7-segment display 24 digitally displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a bonus (hereinafter, the number of payouts) and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot (hereinafter, the number of credits). .

  Side panel units 26L and 26R are provided on both sides of the pedestal portion 12. Each of the side panel units 26L, 26R has a light source, and executes effects by the light emitted from the light source. Further, a settlement button 27 is provided below the side panel unit 26L. The settlement button 27 is provided to pull out the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

  A waist panel unit 31 is provided below the pedestal 12. The waist panel unit 31 has a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn and a light source for emitting light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

  Below the lumbar panel unit 31, a medal payout port 32, speaker holes 33L and 33R, and a medal tray unit 34 are provided. The medal payout opening 32 guides the medals discharged by the driving of a medal payout device 51 described later to the outside. The medals discharged from the medal payout opening 32 are stored in the medal tray unit 34. The speaker holes 33L and 33R are provided to output sounds such as sound effects and music according to the contents of the effect.

<Internal structure>
3 and 4 are perspective views showing the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1. In FIG. 3, the front door 2b is opened, and the middle door 41 provided on the back side of the front door 2b is closed with respect to the front door 2b. Moreover, in FIG. 4, the front door 2b is open | released and the state which the middle door 41 opened with respect to the front door 2b is shown. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the inside of the cabinet 2a. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing the back side of the front door 2b.

  The cabinet 2a has a top plate 20a, a bottom plate 20b, left and right side plates 20c and 20d, and a back plate 20e (see FIG. 5). The cabinet side speaker 42 is arrange | positioned by the upper side inside cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side speaker 42 is attached to the back plate 20e of the cabinet 2a via the mounting brackets 43L and 43R. The cabinet side speaker 42 is, for example, a speaker for outputting sound effects.

  The cabinet side relay board 44 is disposed on the left side of the cabinet side speaker 42 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The cabinet side relay board 44 is attached to the left side plate 20c of the cabinet 2a. The cabinet side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 7) described later attached to the middle door 41 (see FIGS. 3 and 4), a hopper device 51, a game medal auxiliary storage switch (not shown), and a medal Relay the wiring connecting the payout count switch (not shown).

  At a central portion inside the cabinet 2a, an amplifier substrate 45 for controlling the output of sound from the cabinet side speaker 42 is disposed. The amplifier substrate 45 is attached to a mounting shelf 46 fixed to the left and right side plates 20c, 20d.

  In addition, an external concentrated terminal plate 47 is disposed on the right side of the amplifier substrate 45 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The external concentrated terminal plate 47 is attached to the right side plate 20d of the cabinet 2a. The external concentration terminal plate 47 is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  The sub power supply 48 is disposed on the left side of the amplifier substrate 45 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The sub power supply device 48 is attached to the left side plate 20c of the cabinet 2a. The sub power supply device 48 supplies the power of the AC voltage 100 V to the power supply device 53 described later. Further, the power of AC voltage 100 V is converted to the power of DC voltage and supplied to the amplifier substrate 45.

  On the lower side inside the cabinet 2a, a medal payout device (hereinafter, a hopper device) 51, a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply 53 are disposed.

  The hopper device 51 is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 20b in the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 has a structure capable of accommodating a large amount of medals and discharging them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out the medals, for example, when the stored medals exceed 50, or when the settlement button is pressed and the medals are settled. The medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout opening 32 (see FIG. 2).

  The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores the medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is disposed on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is engaged with the bottom plate 20b of the cabinet 2a, and is configured to be removable from the bottom plate 20b.

  The power supply device 53 includes a power switch 53a and a power substrate 53b (see FIG. 7). The power supply device 53 is disposed on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side plate 20c. The power supply device 53 converts the power of the AC voltage 100 V supplied from the sub power supply device 48 into the power of the required DC voltage at each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

  As shown in FIGS. 3, 4 and 6, the middle door 41 is disposed at the center of the back of the front door 2b, and is configured to be able to open and close the reel display window 4 (see FIG. 4) from the back. Door stoppers 41a, 41b and 41c are provided at the upper and lower portions of the middle door 41, respectively. The door stoppers 41a, 41b and 41c fix (prohibit) the opening operation of the middle door 41 in a state in which the reel display window 4 is closed from the back side. That is, in order to open the middle door 41, it is necessary to rotate the door stoppers 41a, 41b and 41c to release the fixation of the middle door 41.

  On the middle door 41, a main control board case 55 housing a main control board 71 (see FIG. 7) and three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are attached. A stepping motor is connected to the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R via gears having a predetermined speed reduction ratio.

  As shown in FIG. 4, when the middle door 41 is opened, the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17 are exposed. As described above, between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement unit 17, an information sheet in which information about the game is described is disposed. This information sheet is inserted into the gap formed between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17 in a state where the middle door 41 is opened and the sheet placement portion 17 is exposed. Ru. Further, also in the case of exchanging the information sheet, after the middle door 41 is opened, the exchange operation of the information sheet is performed.

  The main control board case 55 is provided with a setting key type switch 56. The setting key type switch 56 is used when changing the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 or confirming the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1. In the present embodiment, a main control board unit is configured by the main control board case 55 and the main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55.

  The main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55 constitutes a main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8) described later. The main control circuit 91 is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachi-slot machine 1, such as determination of the internal winning combination, rotation and stop of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and determination of the presence or absence of a prize. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described later.

  Above the middle door 41, a sub control board case 57 for accommodating the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 7) is disposed. The sub control board 72 housed in the sub control board case 57 constitutes a sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9). The sub control circuit 101 is a circuit that controls execution of effects by displaying a video or the like. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 101 will be described later.

  A center speaker 58 is disposed above the sub control board case 57. And the fan 59 is arrange | positioned by the left side of the center speaker 58 seeing the front door 2b from a back surface side. That is, the fan 59 is disposed at the top on the back side of the front door 2b. The fan 59 blows air downward to cool the inside of the pachi-slot machine 1 with air.

  When the front door 2b is viewed from the back side, a sub relay board 61 is disposed on the right side of the sub control board case 57. The sub relay board 61 relays a wire connecting the sub control board 72 and the main control board 71. In addition, it is a board which relays the wiring connecting the sub control board 72 and the board disposed around the sub control board 72. In addition, as a board | substrate arrange | positioned around the sub control board 72, LED board 62A, 62B mentioned later is mentioned.

  The LED substrates 62A and 62B are disposed above the sub control substrate case 57 as viewed from the rear surface side of the front door 2b. The LED boards 62A and 62B cause the LEDs (Light Emitting Diode) 85 (see FIG. 7) to emit light to show a specific example of the light source in accordance with the effects executed by the control of the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 8). Display the blinking pattern. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of LED substrates in addition to the LED substrates 62A and 62B.

  Below the sub relay board 61, a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 is disposed. The 24h door opening and closing monitoring unit 63 stores the history of the opening and closing of the middle door 41. When the middle door 41 is opened, a signal for displaying an error on the liquid crystal display device 11 is output to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 101).

  Below the middle door 41, a board speaker 64 and lower speakers 65L and 65R are disposed. The board speaker 64 faces the waist panel unit 31 (see FIG. 2), and the lower speakers 65L and 65R face the speaker holes 33L and 33R (see FIG. 2).

  A selector 66 and a door open / close monitoring switch 67 are disposed above the lower speaker 65L. The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the material, shape, and the like of the medals are appropriate, and guides the appropriate medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 to the hopper device 51. A medal sensor (not shown) is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 66, for detecting that the appropriate medal has passed.

  The door open / close monitoring switch 67 is disposed on the left side of the selector 66 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. The door open / close monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the open / close of the front door 2 b to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  A door relay terminal plate 68 is disposed below the reel display window 4 and in an area opened and closed by the middle door 41 (see FIG. 4). The door relay terminal board 68 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 7) in the main control board case 55, various buttons and switches, a sub control board 72 (see FIG. 7), a selector 66 and a game operation display board 81. It is a board which relays wiring with (see FIG. 7). Examples of the various buttons and switches include a BET button 22, a settlement button 27, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77 described later, and a start switch 79.

[Control system of pachislot machine]
Next, a control system provided in the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a control system of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 disposed on the middle door 41 and a sub control board 72 disposed on the front door 2 b. The main control board 71 includes a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key type switch 56, an external concentrated terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75, and a power supply board 53b of the power supply device 53. It is connected. The setting key type switch 56, the external concentrated terminal plate 47, the hopper device 51 and the medal auxiliary storage switch 75 are connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet side relay board 44. The external concentrated terminal plate 47 and the hopper device 51 have been described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The reel relay terminal board 74 is disposed inside the reel body of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal board 74 is electrically connected to stepping motors (not shown) of the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays signals outputted from the main control board 71 to the stepping motors.

  The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 penetrates a switch through hole, which will be described later, of the medal auxiliary storage 52. The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 detects whether the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals.

  A power switch 53 a is connected to the power supply substrate 53 b of the power supply device 53. The power switch 53a is turned on when the necessary power is supplied to the pachi-slot machine 1.

  The main control board 71 also includes a selector 66, a door open / close monitor switch 67, a BET switch 77, a settlement switch 78, a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, a game operation display board 81, and the like via a door relay terminal board 68. The sub relay board 61 is connected. The selector 66, the door open / close monitoring switch 67, and the sub relay board 61 have been described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The BET switch 77 detects that the BET button 22 has been pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that the settlement button 27 has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 detects that the player has operated the start lever 23 (start operation).

  The stop switch board 80 is a board that constitutes a circuit for stopping a rotating reel and a circuit for displaying a stoppable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch substrate 80 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each stop button 19L, 19C, 19R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The game operation display board 81 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 24 when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R can be turned and replay is performed when accepting the insertion of medals. It is a substrate for A 7-segment display 24 and an LED 82 are connected to the game operation display board 81. The LED 82 lights, for example, a mark indicating the start of a game, a mark to be played again, and the like.

  The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68 and the sub relay board 61. A sound I / O substrate 84, LED substrates 62A, 62B, and a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 are connected to the sub control substrate 72 via the sub relay substrate 61. The LED substrates 62A, 62B and the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 have been described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The sound I / O substrate 84 outputs sound to the center speaker 58, the board speaker 64, and the lower speakers 65L and 65R. Further, the sound I / O substrate 84 together with the amplifier substrate 45 outputs sound to the canet side speaker 42.

  Further, a ROM cartridge substrate 86 and a liquid crystal relay substrate 87 are connected to the sub control substrate 72. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 and the liquid crystal relay substrate 87 are accommodated in the sub control substrate case 57 together with the sub control substrate 72. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 is a substrate for managing an image (video) for effect, sound, the LED substrates 62A and 62B and other LED substrates (not shown), and communication data. The liquid crystal relay substrate 87 is a substrate for relaying a wire connecting the sub control substrate 72 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the main control circuit 91 configured by the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the main control circuit 91 of the pachislot machine 1.

  The main control circuit 91 mainly includes a microcomputer 92 installed on the main control board 71. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94 and a main RAM 95.

  The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  To the main CPU 93, a clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98 and a sampling circuit 99 are connected. Clock pulse generation circuit 96 and frequency divider 97 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 93 executes the control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates a predetermined range of random numbers (e.g., 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  The main CPU 93 counts the number of times of pulse output to the stepping motor of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R after detecting the reel index. Thus, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angles of the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many reels have been rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one rotation. The reel index is provided, for example, at a predetermined position of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R Detection is performed by a reel position detection unit (not shown) provided with a detection piece interposed therebetween.

  Here, management of the rotation angles of the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Then, each time the pulse counter counts the output of a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) necessary for the rotation of one symbol, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detection unit (not shown).

  That is, in this embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is managed to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to four symbols. Therefore, for example, when the left stop button 19L is pressed, the symbols on the left reel 3L in the middle of the reel display window 4 and each symbol in the range up to the symbol four symbols ahead of the reel display window 4 It becomes a symbol that can be stopped in the middle.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the sub control circuit 101 configured by the sub control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

  The sub control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effects based on commands transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106.

  The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  The program storage area stores a control program to be executed by the sub CPU 102. For example, in the control program, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91, and a random number value for effect extraction, and an effect registration task for determining and registering effect contents (effect data) Is included. In addition, a drawing control task for controlling display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 6) based on the determined effect contents, a lamp control task for controlling light output by a light source such as an LED 85, speakers 42, 58, 64 65 L, 65 R, etc., includes a voice control task for controlling the output of sound.

  The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data relating to creation of a video. Also, a storage area for storing sound data relating to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data relating to a light on / off pattern, and the like are included.

  The sub RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect contents and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

  The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and cause the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the created image.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speakers such as the speakers 42, 58, 64, 65L, 65R to output the sound such as BGM according to the sound data designated by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls lighting and extinguishing of the light source such as the LED 85 in accordance with the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect.

[Transition of gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 10, the gaming state of the pachislot machine 1 will be described. The main CPU 93 sets the gaming state of the pachislot machine 1 as a normal gaming state (RT0 gaming state, RT1 gaming state, RT2 gaming state, RT3 gaming state or RT4 gaming state) and BB gaming state (PBB gaming state, BB during RT0 gaming state) , BB in RT2 gaming state or BB in RB gaming state) is to change the gaming state of each).

<Transition of general gaming state>
As shown in FIG. 10, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, RT0 gaming state, RT1 gaming state, RT2 gaming state, RT3 gaming state, and RT4 gaming state are defined as general gaming states. Note that "RT" is an abbreviation of "replay time", and the RT0 to RT4 gaming state is a gaming state for identifying that the winning probability of the replay role that is the player of replay is different.

  In RT0 gaming state and RT1 gaming state, the winning probability of replay role is set to "8978/65536" (see FIG. 16), and in RT2 gaming state and RT3 gaming state, the winning probability of replay role is "41792/65536" It is set (see FIG. 16). Further, in the RT4 gaming state, the winning probability of the replay role is set to "12000/65536". That is, the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state are the replay low probability state (low RT gaming state) in which the winning probability of the replay combination is relatively low compared to the RT2 to 4 gaming states, and the RT2 gaming state and the RT3 gaming state Is a replay high probability state (high RT gaming state) in which the winning probability of the replay combination is relatively high compared to the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, and the RT4 gaming state. In addition, although the RT4 gaming state has a relatively high probability of winning a replay combination as compared to the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state, the replay having a relatively lower probability of winning a replay combination as compared to the RT2 gaming state and the RT3 gaming state The medium probability state (medium RT gaming state).

  In addition, the winning probability of the replay combination in each RT gaming state (including PBB gaming state, BB during RT0 gaming state, BB during RT2 gaming state or BB during RB gaming state described later) is limited to those described above (or described later) And can be set appropriately. For example, the winning probability of the replay combination in the RT3 gaming state is set to be higher than the winning probability of the replay combination in the RT2 gaming state, and the winning probability of the replay combination gradually increases from the RT1 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state It is good also as composition. In addition, for example, the winning probability of the replay combination in the RT4 gaming state may be set to be the same or equivalent to the winning probability of the replay combination in the RT2 gaming state and the RT3 gaming state.

  When the pachislot machine 1 is first installed in the game arcade, a backup error of the main RAM 95 occurs in the pachislot machine 1 and all storage areas are initialized (initial state), the set value of the pachislot machine 1 is changed If (when the setting has been changed), or if the PBB gaming state, the BB during RT0 gaming state, or the BB during RB gaming state is completed, the gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state.

  In the RT0 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, or the RT3 gaming state, when the combination of any of the RT1 transition lips 1 to 16 described later wins, or the combination of any of the RT1 transition symbols 1 to 8 is effective When displayed on the line, the gaming state is shifted to the RT1 gaming state.

  In the RT1 gaming state, when a combination of symbols of RT2 transition lip 1 or RT2 transition lip 2 described later wins, the gaming state is transitioned to the RT2 gaming state. In addition, in the RT2 gaming state, when the combination of symbols of RT3 transition lip 1 or RT3 transition lip 2 described later wins, the gaming state is transitioned to the RT3 gaming state.

  In the case where the internal winning of the bonus combination (in the present embodiment, PBB or BB1 to 4 which will be described later in this embodiment) is performed in the RT0 gaming state, RT1 gaming state, RT2 gaming state, or RT3 gaming state To shift the gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. The bonus combination is held in the internal winning state from the internal winning to the winning. This is called "possession" and the bonus role is also called "possession role". Further, the RT4 gaming state, which is the internal winning state of the bonus combination, is also called "between flags". The bonus part is drawn only in the RT0 to RT3 gaming state, and not in the RT4 gaming state and the BB gaming state described later (except for the BB RB during the RT0 gaming state during BB).

  In addition, the transition opportunity of each RT gaming state is not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, after one transition opportunity is established, the RT gaming state may be transitioned using another transition opportunity that the game has been performed a predetermined number of times. Moreover, it is also possible to adopt only a part of the above-mentioned transition opportunity.

<Transition of BB gaming state>
As shown in FIG. 10, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a PBB gaming state, an RT0 gaming state during BB, an RT2 gaming state during BB, or an RB gaming state during BB are defined as BB gaming states. Note that "BB" is an abbreviation of "big bonus", and "RB" is an abbreviation of "regular bonus". In addition, "BB" is also called "character continuous actuation device related to a first kind special character", and "RB" is also called "a first kind special character". In addition, it is good also as employ | adopting the "character product continuous operation apparatus which concerns on a 2nd kind special character" as "BB", and "the 2nd kind special character" as "RB". The PBB gaming state and the BB middle RB gaming state are gaming states advantageous to the player because they are gaming states in which the probability of winning a small winning combination is relatively high compared to the normal gaming state. In the BB gaming state, the payout of medals exceeding the prescribed number (297 in the PBB gaming state, RT0 gaming state in BB, RT2 gaming state in BB, and 44 in RB gaming state in BB) is performed during the BB gaming state. End when there is.

  In the RT4 gaming state, when a combination of symbols of PBB described later has won, the gaming state is shifted to the PBB gaming state. In addition, in the PBB gaming state, when there is payout of medals exceeding the prescribed number (297), the gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state.

  In the RT4 gaming state, when a combination of symbols of BB1 to BB4 to be described later wins, the gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state during BB. In addition, when there is payout of medals exceeding the prescribed number (44) in the RT0 gaming state during BB, the gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state. In addition, in the RT0 gaming state during BB, when there is an internal winning of RB during BB before there is a medal payout exceeding the prescribed number (44), the gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state during BB. The BB during RT2 gaming state is a replay high probability state (high RT gaming state) in which the probability of winning the replay role is relatively high compared to the RT0 gaming state during BB (see FIG. 17).

  When there is a payout of medals exceeding the prescribed number (44) in the RT2 gaming state during BB, the gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state. That is, in the BB gaming state, which is shifted based on winning of a combination of symbols of BB 1 to 4 to be described later, the replay high probability state (high RT gaming state) is based on the internal winning of RB in BB. When the BB gaming state ends, the replay high probability state (high RT gaming state) is taken over even in the normal gaming state after the BB gaming state ends. On the other hand, in the RT2 gaming state during BB, if there is a prize in RB during BB before there is a medal payout exceeding the prescribed number (44 sheets), transitioning to the BB gaming state during BB, transitioning to BB gaming state during BB If there is a payout of medals exceeding the prescribed number (44), the gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state. That is, even when the BB during RB transitions to the replay high probability state (high RT gaming state) based on the internal winning of the RB during the BB, when the RB during BB wins, a general game after the end of the BB gaming state The state is the replay low probability state (low RT gaming state).

  In addition, although BB game state in BB is finished based on the winning of 8 small winnings or 12 games being played, in this embodiment, in most cases, any of these in this embodiment Because the termination condition of BB gaming state (the fact that medals exceeding the prescribed number (44) have been paid out) will be satisfied before the final condition of the end of the BB gaming state, after the end of the RB gaming state during BB RT0 It is supposed to shift to the gaming state. Therefore, when the BB gaming state ending condition is satisfied, if the BB gaming state ending condition is not yet satisfied, the gaming state is determined based on the BB ending condition being satisfied. It will be transferred to RT0 gaming state during BB. As described above, the BB RT0 gaming state (including the BB RT2 gaming state) is also referred to as the "BB general gaming state" because it is not in the BB gaming state and has not shifted to the BB RB gaming state.

[Data table stored in main ROM]
Next, various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 19.

<Symbol arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 11 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between twenty symbol positions “0” to “19” and symbols corresponding to each of the symbol positions.

  The symbol position data “0” to “19” indicate the positions of symbols arranged along the rotational direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions “0” to “19” can be identified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  As types of symbols, "red 7", "red BAR", "white BAR", "black BAR", "bell", "replay 1", "replay 2", "watermelon", "cherry" and "blank" Contains ".

  Here, “Replay 1” and “Replay 2” may be distinguishable if the main CPU 93 is internally different symbols, and in the present embodiment, symbols which can be recognized by the player like the same symbols. And Hereinafter, "Replay 1" and "Replay 2" are collectively referred to as "Replay".

<Symbol code table>
As shown in FIG. 12, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table, and is distinguished by 2-byte (16 bits) data in the present embodiment. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 12 represents symbol codes as data for specifying symbols disposed on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  For example, although the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 11 has been described as representing the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of left reel 3L, middle reel 3C and right reel 3R, it is actually stored in main ROM 94 The symbol arrangement table indicates the arrangement of symbol codes specifying the symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R.

  In the present embodiment, the symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 are “red 7”, “red BAR”, “white BAR”, “black BAR”, “bell”, “replay 1”, “replay 2” as described above. , "Watermelon", "cherry" and "blank".

  In the symbol code table, "1" is assigned as a symbol code for the "red 7" symbol. Also, "2" is assigned as a symbol code for the "white BAR" symbol. Also, "3" is assigned as a symbol code for the "black BAR" symbol.

  Similarly, “4” to “10” are assigned as symbol codes for symbols of “bell”, “replay 1”, “replay 2”, “watermelon”, “cherry” and “blank”, respectively.

<Symbol combination table>
In the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, a winning operation flag and a payout number are associated with a combination of symbols identified by storage area identification data represented by 16 bytes.

  The prize operation flag is data assigned corresponding to a unique combination of symbols for representing a winning combination (hereinafter referred to as "winning combination"), and includes 1 byte (8 bits) data and storage area type It is. The storage area type is data for distinguishing 1-byte data. One-byte data includes data corresponding to a combination of a plurality of symbols. The combination of each symbol is distinguished by the storage area type and 1-byte data.

  In the symbol combination tables shown in FIG. 13 to FIG. 15, in order to make the invention easy to understand, names (contents) of winning combinations are associated with winning operation flags for combinations of respective symbols.

  The number of payouts is data indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the player corresponding to the combination of the respective symbols. When the combination of symbols arranged along the effective line matches the "combination of symbols" in the symbol combination table, the medals are paid out by the driving of the hopper device 51 or the number of credits is counted based on the corresponding number of payouts. The credit counter is incremented.

  FIG. 13 shows a symbol combination table related to a bonus combination (including RB in BB). When the combination of the symbols shown in FIG. 13 is displayed on the activated line, the medal is not paid out, but the player is awarded a bonus operating role. That is, when the bonus combination is won, the game mode is shifted to BB gaming state (in the case of RB during BB, RB during BB gaming state).

  In FIG. 13, when the combination of symbols of "red 7-red 7-red 7" indicating the winning combination of "PBB" is displayed on the activated line in the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), the medal is displayed. Although there is no payout, the player is awarded a PBB and shifts to the PBB gaming state. Note that “PBB” is a “decision part” that determines the transition to ART gaming in a normal game to be described later, and determines the number of ART sets and the number of ART games added in ART gaming.

  Combination of symbols of "red 7-red 7-red BAR" showing winning combination of "BB 1", combination of symbol of "red 7-red 7-white BAR" showing winning combination of "BB 2" of "BB 3" The combination of the symbol of "white BAR-white BAR-white BAR" showing the winning combination or the combination of the symbol combination of "white BAR-white BAR-red BAR" showing the winning combination of "BB4" When it is displayed on the activated line in the normal gaming state (RT4 gaming state), although there is no payout of medals, it becomes BB winning and shifts to the BB gaming state (RT0 gaming state during BB).

  Here, the combination of the symbols “BB1” and “BB3” is composed of symbols “red 7” and “red BAR” or “white BAR”. That is, it is a combination of symbols composed of symbols of the same color. In addition, the combination of the symbols "BB2" and "BB4" is composed of "red 7" and "white BAR", or "white BAR" and "red BAR". That is, it is a combination of symbols composed of symbols of different colors. Hereinafter, "BB1" and "BB3" are collectively referred to as "same-color bonus", and "BB2" and "BB4" are collectively referred to as "different-color bonus".

  If a combination of "White BAR-Blank-Blank" showing the winning combination of "RB during BB" is displayed on the activated line in the RT2 gaming state during BB, there is no payout of medals, but during BB It will be a prize in RB, and it shifts to RB gaming state in BB. Note that "RB in RB" is also referred to as "JAC".

  FIG. 14 shows a symbol combination table related to the replay role. When the combination of the symbols shown in FIG. 14 is displayed on the activated line, there is no payout of medals, but the player plays a prize for the replay role. That is, when the replay role is won, it is possible to play again in the next game.

  In FIG. 14, a combination of symbols of "Replay 1-Replay 1-Replay 1" showing a winning combination of "Normal Lip 1" and a "Replay 1-Replay 2-Replay 1" showing a winning combination of "Normal Lip 2" Combination of symbols, combination of symbols of "Replay 1-Replay 1-Replay 2" showing winning combinations of "Normal Lip 3", and "Replay 1-Replay 2-Replay 2" showing winning combinations of "Normal Lip 4" Combination of symbols, combination of symbols of "Replay 2-Replay 2-Replay 2" showing winning combination of "Normal Lip 5", of "Replay 2-Replay 1-Replay 2" showing winning combination of "Normal Lip 6" "Replay 2-Replay 1-Replay 1" showing the combination of symbols, "Replay 2-Replay 2-Replay 1" showing the winning combinations of "Normal Lip 7", or the winning combination of "Normal Rips 8" The pattern of If the combination of any of the symbol combination is displayed on the pay line is, the symbol "replay" are aligned in the middle in the display window 4.

  The combination of symbols of "bell-bell-red 7" showing the winning combination of "RT1 transition lip 1", the combination of the symbols of "bell-bell-watermelon" showing the winning combination of "RT1 transition lip 2", "RT1 transition Combination of symbols of "Bell-Bell-Black BAR" showing winning combination of lip 3 ", combination of symbols of" Red 7-watermelon-bell "showing winning combination of" RT1 transition lip 4 ", or" RT1 transition lip " "Replay" in the lower or upper row in the display window 4 when any symbol combination of the "White BAR-watermelon-bell" symbol combination showing the winning combination of 5 "is displayed on the effective line. The pattern of is aligned. In addition, although the symbol of "Replay" is not arranged in the lower or upper stage in the display window 4, the symbol combination of "RT1 transition lip 6" to "RT1 transition lip 16" is defined as a combination of symbols having the same performance. ing. When a combination of symbols of any of “RT1 transition lip 1” to “RT1 transition lip 16” is displayed on the effective line, the gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state.

  The combination of symbols of "Replay 1-Watermelon-Bell" showing the winning combination of "RT 2 Transition Lip 1" or the combination of "Replay 2-Watermelon-Bell" showing the winning combination of "RT 2 Transition Lip 2" is effective When displayed on the line, the gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state.

  The combination of symbols of "Bell-Replay 1-Bell" showing the winning combination of "RT 3 Transition Lip 1" or the combination of "Bell-Replay 2-Bell" showing the winning combination of "RT 3 Transition Lip 2" is effective When it is displayed on the line, the symbols of "Replay" are aligned right upward in the display window 4, and the gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, only the above-mentioned center line is defined as an effective line, but a combination of symbols relating to a replay role (for example, RT1 transition lip 1 to 5 and RT3 transition lip 1 and 2) 14 as shown in FIG. 14, and the combination of symbols relating to the small part (for example, cross down bells 1 to 4, upper bells 1 to 4, and cross up bells) described later in the description of FIG. By configuring in, five lines (center line aligned in the middle, top line aligned in the upper row, bottom line aligned in the lower row, cross down line aligned downward to the right, cross up line aligned upward to the right) are effective lines It is possible to impress the player as if it were.

  When a combination of symbols of "black BAR-black BAR-black BAR" indicating a winning combination of "BAR complete lip" is displayed on the effective line, the transition to ART game is determined in the normal game described later, In the ART game, determine the addition of the number of ART sets and the number of ART games. That is, "BAR complete lip" is a "decision role". It should be noted that the combination of symbols of "BAR complete rep" is not displayed on the effective line depending on the timing of the stop operation of the player (because "dropout" described later occurs), "BAR complete rep" A combination of symbols “BAR follow lip 1” to “BAR follow lip 12” permitted to be displayed on the effective line together with the combination of symbols is defined. However, as will be described later, the combination of the symbols “BAR follow lip 1” to “BAR follow lip 12” is allowed to be displayed on the effective line even if it is not together with the combination of “BAR aligned lip” symbols It may be done ("BAR match fake"). In this case, the player may aim at the symbol of "black BAR" and perform the stop operation, thereby maintaining the expectation that the combination of the symbols of "BAR with perfect lip" may be aligned to the third stop operation. Is possible.

  FIG. 15 shows a symbol combination table according to a small winning combination etc. in which medals are paid out. When the combination of symbols shown in FIG. 15 is displayed on the effective line, except for “RT1 transition symbol 1” to “RT1 transition symbol 8”, the medals for the number of payouts associated with the combination of the symbols are Be paid out. However, the combination of the symbols “RT1 transition symbol 1” to “RT1 transition symbol 8” may be defined as a combination of symbols relating to a combination with a medal (for example, one sheet) being paid out.

  In FIG. 15, when a combination of symbols of "Replay 1-Bell-Replay 1" showing the winning combination of "Cross Down Bell 1" is displayed on the effective line, "Bell down to the right in the display window 4 The symbol of "" is aligned, and nine medals are paid out. The same applies to "cross down bell 2" to "cross down bell 4" as well as "cross down bell 1".

  When the combination of symbols of "Replay 1-Replay 1-Cherry" showing the winning combination of "upper bell 1" is displayed on the effective line, the symbols of "bell" are aligned on the upper row in the display window 4, Nine medals are paid out. The “upper bell 2” to “upper bell 4” are also the same as “upper bell 1”.

  When a combination of “watermelon-bell-cherry” symbols indicating the winning combination of “cross-up bell” is displayed on the effective line, the “bell” symbols are aligned in the upper right of the display window 4, 9 A medal is paid out. When a combination of “Bell-Bell-Bell” symbols indicating the winning combination of “Middle-bell” is displayed on the active line, the “Bell” symbols are aligned in the middle of the display window 4, and nine The medal is paid out.

  When a combination of symbols of "Replay 1-Blank-Bell" indicating a winning combination of "Left follow small part 1" is displayed on the effective line, one medal is paid out. The same applies to “left follow small role 2” to “left follow small role 16” as well as “left follow small role 1”.

  When the combination of symbols of "red 7-bell-bell" indicating the winning combination of "middle follow small part 1" is displayed on the effective line, one medal is paid out. The same applies to “middle follow small role 2” to “left follow small role 12” as well as “middle follow small role 1”.

  When a combination of symbols of "red 7-cherry-bell" indicating a winning combination of "right follow small part 1" is displayed on the effective line, one medal is paid out. The same applies to “right follow small role 2” to “left follow small role 4” as well as “right follow small role 1”.

  The “follow small part” is, for example, “left middle right bell 1” is determined as the internal winning combination as “push order small part” as described later in the description of FIG. When the stop operation is performed in the stop operation order of “right”, the stop operation order is correct, and any combination of symbols “upper bell 1” to “upper bell 4” is preferentially displayed. The stop control is performed and nine medals are paid out, but when the stop operation is performed in the other stop operation order, the stop operation order becomes incorrect, so “upper bell 1” to “upper "Leave follow small part 1", "left follow small part 2", "left follow small part 5", "left follow small part 6", "left follow small part 9" so as not to win any of Bell 4 " , "Left follow small role 10", "left follow small role 13" and "left side So that the stop control so that one or more combinations of symbols of the row Small Win 14 "is preferentially displayed is performed. In addition, since "dropout" to be described later occurs in "follow small role", in this case, the medal is not paid out, and any of "RT1 transition symbol 1" to "RT1 transition symbol 8" to be described later The combination of symbols will be displayed.

  The combination of symbols of "Cherry-Black BAR-Cherry" showing the winning combination of "March Cherry 1", or the combination of symbols of "Cherry-Cherry-Cherry" showing the winning combination of "Middle Cherry 2" is on the effective line When displayed, one medal is paid out.

  When a combination of symbols of "black BAR-black BAR-red BAR" indicating a winning combination of "strong cherry 1" is displayed on the effective line, two medals are paid out. The same applies to “strong cherry 2” to “strong cherry 10” as to “strong cherry 1”.

  When a combination of symbols of "black BAR-black BAR-cherry" indicating the winning combination of "weak cherry 1" is displayed on the effective line, two medals are paid out. The same applies to "weak cherry 2" and "weak cherry 3" as in "weak cherry 1". The combination of the symbols of "strong cherry" and "weak cherry" is configured such that the symbol of "cherry" is displayed on the lower side of the display window 4 corresponding to the left reel 3L.

  When a combination of symbols of "Red BAR-Watermelon-Replay 2" indicating the winning combination of "Watermelon 1" is displayed on the effective line, four medals are paid out. The same applies to “watermelon 2” to “watermelon 4” as “watermelon 1”. In the combination of symbols of "watermelon 1", the symbols of "watermelon" are aligned upward to the right in the display window 4, and the combination of symbols of "watermelon 2" and "watermelon 3" is decreased to the right in the display window 4. The symbols of "watermelon" are aligned, and the combination of the symbols of "watermelon 4" is configured such that the symbols of "watermelon" are aligned in the middle of the display window 4.

  Combination of symbols of "red BAR-black BAR-blank" showing the winning combination of "special small role 1" or combination of symbols of "white BAR-blank-black BAR" showing the winning combination of "special small role 2" Is displayed on the effective line, one medal is paid out.

  When the combination of symbols of "Replay 1-Cherry-Bell" indicating the winning combination of "RT 1 transition symbol 1" is displayed along the effective line, the medal is not paid out and the gaming state is RT 1 gaming state Migrate to The “RT1 transition symbol 2” to “RT1 transition symbol 8” are also the same as “RT1 transition symbol 1”. The "RT1 transition symbol" is not strictly a "winning combination" but a part of a combination of "losing" symbols, but the main CPU 93 recognizes that the "RT1 transition symbol" is displayed. In order to make it possible, the symbol combination table shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned names are given to distinguish other combinations of symbols relating to bonus roles, combinations of symbols relating to replay roles, and combinations of symbols relating to minor characters etc. The name does not necessarily limit the role of the symbol combination.

  Also, without providing the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, for example, using the symbol code shown in FIG. 11, the main CPU 93 performs control to identify the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line. May be That is, the main CPU 93 may be capable of identifying the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line, and the control method is not limited to that using the symbol combination table.

<Internal lottery table>
In the plurality of internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, lottery values for each gaming state and data pointers are associated with the winning numbers. The internal lottery table is usually stored in the main ROM 94 for each setting value (for example, setting values 1 to 6) of the pachislot machine 1. However, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, description will be made using one internal lottery table.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the random value for lottery extracted from the predetermined numerical range “0 to 65535” is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value corresponding to each winning number, and the result of the subtraction becomes negative or not An internal lottery is performed by making a determination (whether or not a so-called "worried" has occurred).

  Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data pointer (that is, the internal winning combination) associated with the winning number is determined. If "0" is defined as the lottery value, the data pointer (that is, the internal winning combination) associated with the winning number is not determined in the gaming state (ie, the lottery Will not be When the number of determination processes of whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative exceeds the number of winning numbers, the result of the internal lottery process becomes "lost".

  In addition, the winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “lottery value corresponding to each winning number / number of all random numbers that may be extracted (65536)”. In the present embodiment, by appropriately using the plurality of internal lottery tables, the type of the internal winning combination to be determined and the winning probability are varied, and as a result, the expectation held by the player is made uneven.

  The data pointer is data acquired as a result of a lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table, and is data for specifying an internal winning combination defined by an internal winning combination determination table described later.

  That is, the data pointer is data used to determine the storage area type and 1-byte data in the small winning combination / replay winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 18 and the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. . As the data pointer, a small winning combination / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are individually defined corresponding to each winning number.

  The method of the internal lottery process is not limited to the above-described method. For example, a lottery random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" corresponds to each lottery number An internal lottery may be performed by sequentially adding values and determining whether the result of addition has reached a predetermined value (e.g., has reached a predetermined value or more for each winning number).

  Further, for example, the main CPU 93 may perform control to determine the internal winning combination by performing a predetermined operation on the random number value for lottery without providing the internal lottery table shown in FIGS. 16 and 17. . That is, it is sufficient if the main CPU 93 can determine the internal winning combination based on the extracted random value for lottery, and the control method is not limited to that using the internal lottery table.

(Internal lottery table for general gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 16, the internal gaming state internal lottery table referred to in the general gaming state is a lottery value of each winning number in the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state. It specifies. In the internal lottery table for the ordinary gaming state, in the winning numbers "1" to "38", the bonus combination (excluding RB in BB) is won alone or in duplicate with the replay combination or the small combination, and the winning number "39" In ~ 63, the replay player is elected, in the winning numbers "64"-"83", the small winning combination is elected, and in the winning number "84", the RB during BB is independently elected. . In the present embodiment, the configuration of the general gaming state internal lottery table and the configuration of the BB gaming state internal lottery table described later are the same, but may be different.

  In the general gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values assigned to the winning numbers “1” to “38” are common in the RT0 to RT3 gaming states and differ only in the RT4 gaming state. This is because the RT4 gaming state is the internal winning state of the bonus combination and the gaming state in which the bonus combination is not drawn again is repeated. However, since the lottery value of the small winning combination that should have been determined in the winning numbers “1” to “38” is assigned by being added in the winning numbers “76” to “82”, the RT0 to RT4 gaming state There is no change in the probability of winning a small winning combination.

  In the general gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values assigned to the winning numbers “39” to “63” differ in each of the RT0 to RT4 gaming states. That is, the types and the winning probabilities of the replay players randomly selected in each of the RT0 to RT4 gaming states change. In the RT0 gaming state, the lottery value “8318” is assigned to the winning number “39”, the lottery value “655” is assigned to the winning number “40”, and the lottery value “0” is assigned to the winning numbers “41” to “63”. Is assigned.

  In the RT1 gaming state, the lottery value "33" is assigned to the winning number "39", the lottery value "1490" is assigned to the winning numbers "41" to "46", and the winning numbers "40" and "47" to "47" The lottery value "0" is assigned to 63 ". In the RT2 gaming state, the lottery value “17” is assigned to the winning number “39”, the lottery value “64” is assigned to the winning number “40”, and the lottery value “4991” to the winning numbers “47” to “52”. Is assigned, the lottery value “1960” is assigned to the winning numbers “53” to “58”, and the lottery value “0” is assigned to the winning numbers “41” to “46” and “59” to “63” There is. In the RT3 gaming state, the lottery value "2188" is assigned to the winning number "39", the lottery value "13168" is assigned to the winning numbers "59" to "61", and the lottery value "63" to the winning number "62". Is assigned, the lottery value "32" is assigned to the winning number "63", and the lottery value "0" is assigned to the winning numbers "40" to "58". In the RT gaming state, the lottery value “12000” is assigned to the winning number “39”, and the lottery value “0” is assigned to the winning numbers “40” to “63”.

  In the general gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values assigned to the winning numbers “64” to “75” are common to the RT0 to RT4 gaming states. Further, the lottery values assigned to the winning numbers “76” to “82” are common to the RT0 to RT3 gaming states, and differ only in the RT4 gaming state. Further, the lottery values assigned to the winning numbers "83" and "84" are common to the RT0 to RT4 gaming states. The winning number "83" is a winning number which is won only in the PBB gaming state and the BB middle RB gaming state, and the winning number "84" is a winning number which is won only in the BB middle RT0 gaming state.

(Internal lottery table for BB gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 17, the BB gaming state internal lottery table referred to in the BB gaming state is a lottery of each winning number in the PBB gaming state, the BB middle RT0 gaming state, the BB middle RT2 gaming state and the BB middle RB gaming state. It defines the value. Here, the configurations of the winning numbers “1” to “84” are the same as those of the internal gaming table for the general gaming state, and therefore the description will be omitted.

  In the BB gaming state internal lottery table shown in FIG. 17, the winning numbers “2”, “4” to “11”, “13” to “20”, in the RT0 gaming state during BB and the RT2 gaming state during BB. “22” to “29” and “31” to “38” are assigned the same lottery value as the lottery value in the RT0 to RT3 gaming state, but this corresponds to the BB RT0 gaming state and the BB RT2 It does not indicate that the bonus combination (excluding RB in BB) can be determined as the internal winning combination in the gaming state, and is determined to overlap with the bonus combination (excluding RB in BB) in the RT0 to RT3 gaming state. The replay role or the minor role indicates that the lottery is performed with the same winning probability. Therefore, similarly to the RT4 gaming state and the BB in-BB gaming state, all lottery values assigned to the winning numbers "1" to "38" may be "0" and may be determined for the winning numbers "1" to "38". It is good also as adding and allocating in lottery number "76"-"82" the lottery value of the small part which should have been.

<Internal winning combination determination table for small part / replay>
In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 18, data for identifying a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted (winning operation flag) is associated with the small winning combination / replay data pointer. ing.

  Further, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 18, the data of the internal winning combination to the small winning combination / replay data pointer is omitted for convenience, and the name (content) of the winning combination and the internal winning combination The names (remarks) of are associated with each other.

  Here, in the present embodiment, it is possible to associate a plurality of combinations of symbols for which winning is permitted (winning operation flag) with one data pointer. Thereby, it is possible to permit winning of a combination of a plurality of symbols (winning operation flag) in one internal lottery process. These internal lottery methods are called "simultaneous winning" method and "duplicate winning" method.

  In the present embodiment, one combination of symbols for which winning is permitted (winning operation flag) can be defined as "internal winning combination", or winning is permitted for one data pointer. Although a combination of a plurality of symbols (prize operation flag) can be defined as an internal winning combination as one unit, in FIGS. 18 to 20, the latter is defined and described as an internal winning combination.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “0” is associated with “loss”. That is, regarding the replay role and the minor role, it is not permitted to be displayed on the effective line for any combination of symbols relating to the winning.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “1” indicates “normal ripple 1” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As the (prize operation flag), "normal ripples 1 to 8" are associated.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "2" indicates "normal ripple 2" as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As the (prize operation flag), "normal RIP 1-8", "BAR complete RIP", and "BAR follow RIP 1-12" are associated with each other.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "3" indicates "left middle right RT2 transition lip" as the inner winning combination, and the winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), “normal lips 1 to 8” and “RT2 transition lips 1 and 2” are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “4” indicates “right middle middle RT2 transition ripple” as the internal winning combination, and a symbol is permitted for winning a prize. As a combination (prize operation flag), “Normal Lips 1 to 8”, “RT2 Transition Lips 1 and 2”, and “BAR Follow Lip 1” are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "5" indicates "middle left / right RT2 transition lip" as the internal winning combination, and a winning combination is permitted. As a combination (prize operation flag), “Normal Lip 1 to 8”, “RT1 Transition Lip 4 to 6”, and “RT2 Transition Lip 1 and 2” are associated.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “6” indicates “middle right left RT2 transition ripple” as the internal winning combination, and a symbol is permitted for winning a prize. As combinations (winning operation flags), “Normal Lip 1 to 8”, “RT1 Transition Lip 4 to 6”, “RT 2 Transition Lip 1 and 2”, and “BAR Follow Lip 1” are associated.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “7” indicates “right / left middle RT2 transition ripple” as the internal winning combination, and a symbol for which winning is permitted As combinations (winning operation flags), “Normal Lip 1 to 8”, “RT1 Transition Lip 4 to 6”, “RT 2 Transition Lip 1 and 2”, and “BAR Follow Lip 2” are associated.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “8” indicates “right middle left RT2 transition lip” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (prize operation flag), “normal lips 1 to 8”, “RT1 transition lips 4 to 6”, “RT2 transition lip 1 and 2”, and “BAR follow lip 3” are associated.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "9" indicates "left middle right RT2 maintenance rep" as the inner winning combination, and a winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), “normal lips 1 to 8” and “RT1 transition lips 1 to 3 and 7 to 12” are associated.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "10" indicates "right middle middle left RT2 maintenance lip" as the inner winning combination, and a symbol is permitted for winning a prize. As a combination (prize operation flag), “Normal Lip 1 to 8”, “RT1 Transition Lip 1 to 3, 7 to 12”, and “BAR Follow Lip 1” are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "11" indicates "middle left / right RT2 maintenance lip" as the internal winning combination, and a symbol for which winning is permitted. As a combination (prize operation flag), “Normal Lip 1 to 8” and “RT1 Transition Lip 1 to 3, 7 to 16” are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “12” indicates “middle right left RT2 maintenance rep” as the internal winning combination, and a symbol for which winning is permitted. As a combination (prize operation flag), “Normal Lip 1 to 8”, “RT1 Transition Lip 1 to 3, 7 to 16”, and “BAR Follow Lip 1” are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "13" indicates "right left / middle middle RT2 maintenance rep" as the internal winning combination, and a symbol is permitted for winning a prize. As a combination (prize operation flag), “Normal Lip 1 to 8”, “RT1 Transition Lip 1 to 3, 7 to 16”, and “BAR Follow Lip 2” are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “14” indicates “right middle left RT 2 maintenance rep” as the internal winning combination, and a winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), “normal lips 1 to 8”, “RT1 transition lips 1 to 3, 7 to 16”, and “BAR follow lip 3” are associated.

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “15” indicates “left middle right RT3 transition lip” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), “normal lips 1 to 8”, “RT1 transition lips 1 to 6”, and “RT3 transition lip 1 and 2” are associated.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “16” indicates “right middle middle RT3 transition ripple” as the internal winning combination, and a symbol is permitted for winning a prize. As combinations (winning operation flags), “Normal Lip 1 to 8”, “RT1 Transition Lip 1 to 6”, “RT 3 Transition Lip 1 and 2”, and “BAR Follow Lip 1” are associated.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "17" indicates "middle left / right RT3 transition lip" as the internal winning combination, and a winning combination is permitted. As a combination of (prize operation flag), “RT1 transition lip 1 to 3 and 7 to 16” and “RT3 transition lip 1 and 2” are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “18” indicates “middle right left RT3 transition lip” as the internal winning combination, and a symbol for which winning is permitted As combinations (winning operation flags), “RT1 transition lip 1 to 3, 7 to 16”, “RT3 transition lip 1 and 2”, and “BAR follow lip 1” are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “19” indicates “right / left middle RT3 transition ripple” as the internal winning combination, and a symbol for which winning is permitted “RT1 transition lip 1 to 12” and “RT3 transition lip 1 and 2” are associated with each other as a combination of (prize operation flag).

  Also, in the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “20” indicates “right middle left RT3 transition lip” as the internal winning combination, and winning is permitted. As combinations of symbols (winning operation flags), “RT1 transition lip 1 to 12”, “RT3 transition lip 1 and 2”, and “BAR follow lip 1” are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "21" indicates "left RT3 maintenance rep" as the internal winning combination, and the winning combination is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), "normal Lips 1 to 8" and "RT1 transition Lips 1 to 3" are associated.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "22" indicates "mid RT3 maintenance rep" as the internal winning combination, and the winning combination is permitted. As combinations (winning operation flag), “normal RIP 1-8”, “RT1 transition RIP 1-3” and “BAR follow RIP 1” are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "23" indicates "right RT3 maintenance rep" as the internal winning combination, and the winning combination is permitted. As combinations (winning operation flag), “normal RIPs 1 to 8”, “RT1 transition lips 1 to 3”, and “BAR follow lip 2” are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "24" indicates the "BAR perfect match" as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As the (prize operation flag), “normal RIP 1-8”, “RT3 transition RIP 1 and 2”, and “BAR follow RIP 1 to 12” are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “25” indicates “bar all together lip” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As the (prize operation flag), “normal RIP 1 to 8”, “RT3 transition RIP 1 and 2”, “BAR complete RIP” and “BAR follow lip 1 to 12” are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "26" indicates "left middle right bell 1" as the inner winning combination, and a symbol for which winning is permitted “Upper bell 1 to 4” and “left follow small game 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14” are associated with each other as a combination (winning operation flag).

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "27" indicates "left middle right bell 2" as the internal winning combination, and a symbol for which winning is permitted. As the combination of (combination operation flag), “upper bell 1 to 4” and “left follow small game 3, 4, 7, 8, 11, 12, 15, 16” are associated.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "28" indicates "BELL 1 on the left and right" as the internal winning combination, and the symbol of the winning combination is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), “upper bell 1 to 4” and “left follow small game 3, 4, 7 to 10, 13, 14” are associated.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “29” indicates “Mid left / right bell 2” as the internal winning combination, and a winning combination is permitted. As the combination (winning operation flag), “upper bell 1 to 4” and “left follow small game 1, 2, 5, 6, 11, 12, 15, 16” are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "30" indicates "middle left and right bell 1" as the internal winning combination, and a symbol of a winning combination is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), "cross-up bell", "left follow small role 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14", "middle follow small role 1, 2" and "right follow small The roles 2, 4 are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "31" indicates "middle left and right bell 2" as the internal winning combination, and the symbol of the winning combination is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), "cross-up bell", "left follow small part 3, 4, 7, 8, 11, 12, 15, 16" and "middle follow small part 3, 4" are associated with each other There is.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “32” indicates “middle right / left bell 1” as the internal winning combination, and the winning combination is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), "cross-up bell", "left follow small role 1, 2, 5, 6", "middle follow small role 5, 6, 9, 10" and "right follow small role 2, 4 Are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "33" indicates "middle right left bell 2" as the internal winning combination, and the winning combination is permitted. As combinations (winning operation flags), "cross-up bell", "left follow small role 3, 4, 7, 8" and "middle follow small role 7, 8, 10, 12" are associated.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "34" indicates "right, left, middle, bell 1" as the internal winning combination, and the winning combination is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), "middle bell", "left follow small game 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14" and "right follow small game 1, 2" are associated .

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "35" indicates "right, left, middle, bell 2" as the internal winning combination, and the winning combination is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), "middle bell", "left follow small part 3, 4, 7, 8, 11, 12, 15, 16" and "right follow small part 3, 4" are associated. .

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "36" indicates "right middle left bell 1" as the inner winning combination, and a symbol for which winning is permitted. As a combination of (combination operation flag), “middle bell” and “left follow small game 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14” are associated.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "37" indicates "right middle left bell 2" as the inner winning combination, and a symbol for which winning is permitted is made. As a combination of (combination operation flag), “middle bell” and “left follow small role 3, 4, 7, 8, 11, 12, 15, 16” are associated with each other.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “38” indicates “unqualified bell” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted ( “Cross down bells 1 to 4” are associated as the winning operation flag).

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “39” indicates “weak cherry” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted ( "Weak cherry 1 to 3" is associated as a winning operation flag).

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “40” indicates “strong cherry” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted ( As the winning operation flag), "strong cherry 1-10" and "weak cherry 1-3" are associated.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “41” indicates “middle cherry” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted ( As the winning operation flag), “middle cherry 1, 2”, “strong cherry 1 to 10” and “weak cherry 1 to 3” are associated.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “42” indicates “watermelon” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted (winning) “Watermelons 1 to 4” are associated as operation flags).

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "43" indicates "chance 1" as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As the (prize operation flag), "special small winning combination 1" is associated. In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer "44" indicates "chance 2" as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted. As the (prize operation flag), "special small role 2" is associated.

  Here, "the chance eye" is a combination of symbols of "losing" without payout of medals, but unlike the combination of symbols relating to the usual "losing", the bonus role may have been won It can be defined as a combination of special symbols that can give the feeling of expectation. When “special small role 1” and “special small role 2” are determined to be the internal winning combination in the normal gaming state, the bonus combination is also won with a probability of 104/256 for both (see FIG. 16). Therefore, in the present embodiment, when “special small role 1” or “special small role 2” is determined as the internal winning combination, and a “dropout” described later occurs, a combination of special symbols is selected. It is supposed to be displayed on the display window 4. In addition, even when the special small role 1 and the special small portion 2 win, the same sense of expectation that the bonus combination is won twice is the same, so the special small portion 1 and the special small role 2 It can be said that the combination of the symbols itself is also a chance eye.

  In the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination / replay data pointer “45” indicates “all small winning combinations” as the internal winning combination, and the symbol pertaining to all the small winning combinations. A winning combination (see FIG. 15) is permitted.

<Internal winning combination decision table for bonus>
In the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 19, data for identifying a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted (winning operation flag) is associated with the bonus data pointer.

  Further, in the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 19, the data of the internal winning combination is omitted with respect to the bonus data pointer for convenience, and the name (content) of the winning combination and the name of the internal winning combination ( Note) is associated.

  In the bonus internal winning combination determination table, the bonus data pointer "0" is associated with "loss". The bonus data pointer "1" indicates "PBB" as an internal winning combination, and "PBB" is associated as a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted (winning operation flag).

  Further, in the bonus internal winning combination determination table, the bonus data pointer "2" indicates "BB1" as the internal winning combination, and as "combination of symbols for which winning is permitted (winning operation flag)," “BB1” is associated. The bonus data pointer "3" indicates "BB2" as an internal winning combination, and "BB2" is associated as a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted (winning operation flag). The bonus data pointer "4" indicates "BB3" as an internal winning combination, and "BB3" is associated as a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted (winning operation flag). The bonus data pointer "5" indicates "BB4" as the internal winning combination, and "BB4" is associated as a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted (winning operation flag). The bonus data pointer "6" indicates "JAC" as an internal winning combination, and "BB in RB" is associated as a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted (winning operation flag). There is.

[Relationship between stop operation order for internal winning combination and winning combination]
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the relationship between the stop operation order for the internal winning combination and the winning combination will be described.

  In FIG. 20, as the stop operation order, "left middle right" means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 19L, the stop button 19C and the stop button 19R, and the "right and left middle" is the stop button 19L, "Middle left and right" means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 19C, the stop button 19L, and the stop button 19R, "the middle and left" means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 19R and the stop button 19C. “Right and left” means that the stop operation is performed in the order of the stop button 19C, the stop button 19R, and the stop button 19L, and “in the right and left middle” is the stop operation in the order of the stop button 19R, the stop button 19L, and the stop button 19C. "Right middle left" means stop button 19R, stop button 19C, it means that the order stop operation of the stop buttons 19L is made.

<Overview of Reel Stop>
In this embodiment, there may be a plurality of combinations of symbols for which winning is permitted for one internal winning combination, and at what timing the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are operated. Depending on (stop operation timing) and in what order the operation is performed (stop operation order), control may be performed so that the finally displayed winning combination is also changed.

  That is, as to which symbol combination the symbol combination finally displayed on the effective line will be (in other words, as the basic information when the main CPU 93 executes the reel stop control), It is determined based on the three elements of

  The first element is the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery process. For example, in the case where the result of the internal lottery process is "losing" (the value of the small combination / replay data pointer is "0"), the combination of symbols pertaining to any replay combination or the combination of symbols pertaining to the small combination Is never displayed on the effective line.

  The second element is the player's stop operation timing (in other words, the position of the symbol when the player operates any stop button). For example, in the present embodiment, since four symbols are determined as the maximum number of sliding symbols, even if one of the internal winning combinations is won as a result of the internal lottery process, the winning is permitted. When the symbols constituting the combination of symbols being arranged are arranged to exceed four symbols, the combination of symbols for which winning is permitted may not be displayed depending on the timing of the stop operation of the player. This is referred to as "dropout", and in Fig. 20, "or lost" means that this "dropout" is present. Therefore, in the same figure, when not written as "or lost", it means that the combination of at least one of the symbols displayed among the displayed winning combinations is displayed, and there is no "dropout". .

  The third element is the player's stop operation order. For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is "normal RIP 1" (the value of the small combination / replay data pointer is "1"), the stop operation timing is used regardless of the stop operation order. Regardless, as shown in FIG. 20, control is performed such that a combination of symbols relating to any of the replay roles of “normal lips 1 to 8” is displayed on the effective line.

  However, if, for example, the result of the internal lottery process is "left middle right bell 1" (the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "26"), the stop operation order is "left middle right". The control is performed so that any combination of symbols of "upper bell 1-4" is preferentially displayed on the effective line regardless of the stop operation timing, while the stop operation sequence is the other stop operation In the case of the order, the control is performed so that any combination of symbols of "left follow role 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14" is preferentially displayed on the effective line. It will be. And when stop operation timing is the timing which can display the symbol which constitutes the combination of the symbol in any of "left follow part 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14" on an effective line As long as the combination of symbols of "left follow part 1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14" is displayed on the effective line, the stop operation timing is "left follow part 1, 2, 5, , 6, 9, 10, 13, 14 ”, which is a timing that can be displayed on the effective line when the symbols constituting the combination of symbols are displayed,“ RT1 ”which is a part of the combination of“ losing ”symbols A combination of symbols of any of the transition symbols 1 to 8 "is to be displayed on the effective line.

  Here, the internal winning combination "left middle right RT2 transition rep" (the value of the data pointer for small part and replay is "3") is at the stop operation timing only when the stop operation order is "left middle right". Regardless, one of “RT2 transition lip 1 and 2” wins, and shifts to the RT2 gaming state which is the replay high probability state (high RT gaming state). Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "left middle right RT2 transition ripple" (the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer is "3"), the stop operation order "left middle right" is the most advantageous stop for the player. It becomes an operation procedure.

  Similarly, when the internal winning combination is "right and left middle RT2 transition lip" (small part and replay data pointer value is "4"), the stop operation sequence "right and left middle" is the most advantageous stop operation for the player. In the case where the internal winning combination is "middle left and right RT2 transition rep" (the value of the small combination and replay data pointer is "5"), the stop operation order "middle left and right" is the stop that is most advantageous for the player. When the internal winning combination is “middle right left RT2 transition rep” (small play data for replays data pointer value is “6”), the stop operation order “middle right left” is most advantageous for the player. When the internal winning combination is “right middle left RT2 transition ripple” (small play data for replays data pointer value “7”), the stop operation order “right left middle” is most advantageous for the player. Procedure of the stop operation If the internal winning combination is "right middle left RT2 transition rep" (small part and replay data pointer value is "8"), the stop operation sequence "right middle left" is the most advantageous stop operation for the player. It becomes the procedure of.

  In addition, the internal winning combination "left middle right RT2 maintenance rep" (small part and replay data pointer value is "9") only when the stop operation order is "left middle right", regardless of the stop operation timing. Instead, one of the “normal lips 1 to 8” wins, and the RT2 gaming state, which is the replay high probability state (high RT gaming state), is maintained. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "left middle right RT2 maintenance rep" (the value of the small part / replay data pointer is "9"), the stop operation order "left middle right" is the most advantageous stop for the player. It becomes an operation procedure.

  Similarly, when the internal winning combination is "right and left middle RT2 maintenance rep" (small part and replay data pointer value is "10"), the stop operation sequence "right and left middle" is the most advantageous stop operation for the player. In the case where the internal winning combination is “middle left and right RT2 maintenance rep” (small part and replay data pointer value is “11”), the stop operation order “middle left and right” is the stop that is most advantageous for the player. When the internal winning combination is "middle left left RT2 maintenance rep" (the value of the data pointer for small part and replay is "12"), the stop operation order "middle right left" is most advantageous for the player. If the internal winning combination is “right middle left RT2 maintenance rep” (small part and replay data pointer value is “13”), the stop order “right left middle” is most advantageous for the player. Stop operation When the internal winning combination is “right middle left RT2 maintenance rep” (small play data for replays data pointer value “14”), the stop operation order “right middle left” is most advantageous for the player. It becomes the procedure of stop operation.

  In addition, the internal winning combination "left middle right RT3 transition rep" (small part and replay data pointer value is "15") is different from the stop operation timing only when the stop operation order is "left middle right". Instead, one of the “RT3 transition lip 1 and 2” wins, and it shifts to the RT3 gaming state which is the replay high probability state (high RT gaming state). The RT3 gaming state is a gaming state in which an ART game described later is performed. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "left middle right RT3 transition lip" (small part and replay data pointer value is "15"), the stop operation order "left middle right" is the most advantageous stop for the player. It becomes an operation procedure.

  Similarly, when the internal winning combination is "right and left middle RT3 transition lip" (small part and replay data pointer value is "16"), the stop operation sequence "right and left middle" is the most advantageous stop operation for the player. In the case where the internal winning combination is "middle left and right RT3 transition rep" (the value of the data pointer for small part and replay is "17"), the stop operation order "middle left and right" is the stop that is most advantageous for the player. If the internal winning combination is “middle right left RT3 transition rep” (small play data for replay data pointer value is “18”), the stop operation order “middle right left” is most advantageous for the player. When the internal winning combination is “right to left middle RT3 shift rep” (small play data for replays data pointer value is “19”), the stop operation order “right to left middle” is most advantageous for the player. Stop operation When the internal winning combination is "right middle left RT3 transition rep" (the value of the data pointer for small part and replay is "20"), the stop operation order "right middle left" is most advantageous for the player. It becomes the procedure of stop operation.

  In addition, the internal winning combination "left RT3 maintenance rep" (small part and replay data pointer value is "21"), the stop operation order is "left middle right" or "left and right middle" (ie, "left first stop" Only in the case of “), regardless of the stop operation timing, any one of“ Normal Rips 1 to 8 ”wins, and the RT3 gaming state which is the replay high probability state (high RT gaming state) is maintained. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "left RT3 maintenance rep" (the value of the data pointer for small part and replay is "21"), the stop operation sequence "left first stop" is the most advantageous stop operation for the player. It becomes the procedure of.

  Similarly, when the internal winning combination is "Medium RT3 Maintenance Rep" (small part and replay data pointer value is "22"), the stop operation order "Medium left and right" or "Medium right left" (ie, "Medium The first stop ") is the procedure of the stop operation most advantageous to the player, and the stop operation is performed when the internal winning combination is" right RT3 maintenance rep "(the value of the data pointer for small part and replay is" 23 "). The order "right-left middle" or "right-middle-left" (ie, "right first stop") is the procedure of the stop operation most advantageous to the player.

  In addition, the internal winning combination "left middle right bell 1" (small part · replay data pointer value "26") and "left middle right bell 2" (small part · replay data pointer value "27") In terms of the stop operation order (refer to FIG. 20), since it is common in that similar benefits can be given, it can be generically referred to as "left middle right bell". Here, when the result of the internal lottery process is "left middle right bell", nine medals are paid out regardless of the stop operation timing only when the stop operation order is "left middle right". Be Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "left middle right bell", the stop operation order "left middle right" is the procedure of the most advantageous stop operation for the player.

  Also, the internal winning combination "Bell 1 in left and right" (the value of the data pointer for small part and replay is "28") and "Bell 2 in the left," (the value for the data pointer for small part and replay is "29") Focusing on the stop operation order (see FIG. 20), it can be generically referred to as "right and left middle bell" because it is common in that similar benefits can be given. Here, in the case where the result of the internal lottery process is "right and left middle bell", nine medals are paid out regardless of the stop operation timing only when the stop operation order is "right and left middle". Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "right and left middle bell", the stop operation order "right and left middle" is the procedure of the most advantageous stop operation for the player.

  In addition, the internal winning combination "Middle left and right bell 1" (small part and replay data pointer value "30") and "Middle left and right bell 2" (small part and replay data pointer value "31") Focusing on the stop operation order (see FIG. 20), it can be generically referred to as "middle left and right bell" because it is common in that similar benefits can be provided. Here, when the result of the internal lottery process is "middle left and right bell", nine medals are paid out regardless of the stop operation timing only when the stop operation order is "middle left and right". Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "middle left and right bell", the stop operation order "middle left and right" is the procedure of the most advantageous stop operation for the player.

  In addition, the internal winning combination "middle right left bell 1" (small part · replay data pointer value "32") and "middle right left bell 2" (small part · replay data pointer value "33"), Focusing on the stop operation order (see FIG. 20), it can be generically referred to as "middle right left bell" because it is common in that similar benefits can be provided. Here, when the result of the internal lottery process is "middle right left bell", nine medals are paid out regardless of the stop operation timing only when the stop operation order is "middle right left". Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "middle right left bell", the stop operation order "middle right left" is the procedure of the stop operation most advantageous for the player.

  Also, the internal winning combination "Bell 1 in right and left" (the value of the data pointer for small part and replay is "34") and "Bell 2 in the right and left" (the value of the data pointer for small part and replay is "35") Focusing on the stop operation order (see FIG. 20), it can be generically referred to as "right, left, middle bell" because it is common in that similar benefits can be provided. Here, when the result of the internal lottery process is “right and left middle bell”, nine medals are paid out regardless of the stop operation timing only when the stop operation order is “right and left middle”. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "right and left middle bell", the stop operation order "right and left middle" is the procedure of the stop operation most advantageous to the player.

  In addition, the internal winning combination "right middle left bell 1" (small part · replay data pointer value "36") and "right middle left bell 2" (small part · replay data pointer value "37") In terms of the stop operation order (refer to FIG. 20), since it is common in that similar benefits can be given, it can be generically referred to as "right middle left bell". Here, when the result of the internal lottery process is “right middle left bell”, nine medals are paid out regardless of the stop operation timing only when the stop operation order is “right middle left”. Be Therefore, when the internal winning combination is “right middle left bell”, the stop operation order “right middle left” is the procedure of the stop operation most advantageous for the player.

  As described above, based on the above-described third factor, the internal winning combination in which the player's profit changes is referred to as a so-called "push order", and in the case of a replay role, it is referred to as "push order replay". In the case of a minor, it may be referred to as a "push order minor."

  In the present embodiment, in the ART game, it is assumed that the stop operation order which is the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is notified when the “pushed order” is determined as the internal winning combination.

<Stop control of reel>
The main CPU 93 executes the following processing to realize the above-described stop control of the reels.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines an internal winning combination in an internal lottery process (see S14 of FIG. 63) to be described later, and stores information on the internal winning combination in the main RAM 95. At S16 of 63, various stop control information stored in the main ROM 94 is read out based on the internal winning combination and stored in the main RAM 95.

  Here, if information stored as various stop control information is illustrated, at which symbol position on each reel at which the stop button is operated is stopped at which symbol position in relation to the above-mentioned second element ( In relation to the information specifying the number of sliding pieces directly or indirectly or in relation to the above-mentioned third element, when the stop button is operated in which stop operation sequence, which symbol combination is preferentially displayed It is possible to cite information that directly or indirectly defines the parameter.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stops each reel based on various stop control information stored in the main RAM 95 in a reel stop control process (see S22 of FIG. 63) described later. In particular, when the internal winning combination is a "punitive role", appropriate stop control information is selected from among the stored stop control information according to the stop operation order, or one stop operation is performed. After that, stop control information is generated (changed) to perform stop control.

  Depending on the stop operation timing and the stop operation order, different stop controls may be executed even with the same internal winning combination, but the stop control is uniquely determined in advance and is the same. The same stop control is executed as long as the internal winning combination and the same stop operation timing and stop operation sequence are performed.

[Configuration of storage area allocated to main RAM]
Next, configurations of various storage areas allocated to the main RAM 95 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Internal winning combination storage area>
The internal winning combination storing area shown in FIG. 21 is constituted by 16 storage areas of the internal winning combination storing areas 1-16. The internal winning combination storing area is configured to be able to store data (bits) corresponding to the combination of each symbol specified in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, and as a result of the internal lottery process, winning is achieved. "1" is set to data (bit) according to the combination of symbols permitted, and "0" is set to data (bit) according to the combination of symbols not winning. It should be noted that "RT1 transition symbols 1 to 8" are not strictly internal winning combinations, but are combinations of symbols displayed by the drop of a push order small combination, and therefore are not stored in the internal winning combination storing area. Good. In this case, it may be constituted by 15 storage areas of the internal winning combination storing areas 1-15.

<Display combination storage area>
The display combination storage area shown in FIG. 22 is configured by 16 storage areas of the display combination storage areas 1-16. The display combination storage area is configured in the same manner as the internal winning combination storage area described above, and as a result of the internal lottery process, of the combinations of symbols for which winning is permitted, symbols that can be displayed on the activated line "1" is set to data (bit) corresponding to the combination, and "0" is set to data (bit) corresponding to the combination of symbols that can not be displayed. Also, in the display combination storing area, each time the respective reels of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R stop, the data (bit) is updated based on the data (bit) stored in the symbol code storage area described later The combination of symbols in which "1" is set even after all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R have stopped is a winning combination. That is, the display combination storing area is used by the main CPU 93 to identify a winning combination after all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped.

<Symbol code storage area>
The symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 23 is composed of 16 storage areas of symbol code storage areas 1 to 16. The symbol code storage area is configured similarly to the above-described internal winning combination storage area and display combination storage area, and is effective among combinations of respective symbols defined in the symbol combination table shown in FIG. 13 to FIG. The data (bit) corresponding to the combination of symbols that can be displayed on the line is set to "1", and the data (bit) corresponding to the combination of symbols that can not be displayed is "0". Is set. Further, in the symbol code storage area, the data (bit) is updated each time the respective reels of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R stop.

<Holding part storage area>
In the carryover combination storage area shown in FIG. 24, data relating to the carryover combination is stored. For example, when a bonus combination (including RB in BB) is internally won, bit 0 of the carryover combination storage area corresponding to the internally won bonus combination is set to "1", and the bonus combination is won and the BB gaming state When transitioning to (BB during RB in the case of RB during BB), the corresponding bit is reset to “0”.

<Playing state flag storage area>
In the gaming state flag storage area shown in FIG. 25, data relating to each gaming state of the BB gaming state and the RT gaming state is stored. For example, when the PBB gaming state is entered, bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to "1".

  Also, for example, when the RT gaming state becomes the RT1 gaming state, the bit 4 of the gaming state flag storage area is set to "1". When all the bits 0 to 7 of the gaming state flag storage area are "0", the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state.

<Actual stop button storage area>
The operation stop button storage area shown in FIG. 26 stores the operation states of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R. Bit 0 corresponds to the stop button 19L, and "1" is stored in bit 0 when the stop button 19L is operated.

  Similarly, bit 1 corresponds to the stop button 19C, and "1" is stored in bit 1 when the stop button 19C is operated. Also, bit 2 corresponds to the stop button 19R, and when the stop button 19R is operated, "1" is stored in bit 2.

  Bit 4 corresponds to the stop button 19L, and "1" is stored in bit 4 when the stop button 19L is valid. Bit 5 corresponds to the stop button 19C, and "1" is stored in bit 5 when the stop button 19C is valid. Further, bit 6 corresponds to the stop button 19R, and when the stop button 19R is valid, "1" is stored in the bit 6.

  In the present embodiment, the effective stop button corresponds to the stop button 19L, 19C, 19R corresponding to the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R and capable of detecting the stop operation by the main CPU 93.

<Pressing order storage area>
The pressing order storage area shown in FIG. 27 is an area for storing information indicating the pressing order (that is, the pressing order) of the three stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R. Bit 0 corresponds to the pressing order "left → middle → right", and "1" is stored in bit 0 when the pressing order is "left → middle → right", and the other bits are "0". It is reset.

  Similarly, bit 1 corresponds to the pressing order "left → right → middle", bit 2 corresponds to the pressing order "middle → left → right", and bit 3 corresponds to the pressing order "middle → right → left" The bit 4 corresponds to the pressing order "right → left → middle", and the bit 5 corresponds to the pressing order "right → middle → left".

[Composition of various lottery tables used for effects etc.]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 28 to 61, the configurations of various lottery tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 will be described.

<PBB medium added ART game number lottery table>
The ART game number lottery table of the PBB shown in FIG. 28 is referred to in the start command reception process described later in the description of FIG. 80, and the ART game to be added during the PBB gaming state (“PBB” in FIG. 62). Used to determine the number.

  As shown in FIG. 28, in the PBB medium added ART game number lottery table, lottery values are assigned such that any one of the added ART game numbers 5 to 300 games is determined based on the internal winning combination. It is done. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 28 and each element used for the lottery are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on set values.

  That is, in the PBB gaming state, the number of added ART games is determined on the basis of the type of the determined internal winning combination for each unit game, and the number of ART games in the ART gaming transitioning after the end of the PBB gaming state is added.

<Battle CZ character lottery table>
The character lottery table in battle CZ shown in FIG. 29 is referred to in the processing upon reception of a prize operation command described later in the description of FIG. 88, and battles against enemy characters when battle effect is executed during "battle CZ". It is used to determine the type of the ally character. Here, "CZ" is an abbreviation of "chance zone", and means that the degree of expectation for transitioning to ART game which is advantageous to the player is high. In addition, the flow of the game regarding "Battle CZ" will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the battle CZ character lottery table, lottery values are assigned so that any one of the teammate character A, the teammate character B, and the teammate character C is determined based on the setting value. There is. The lottery values assigned in FIG. 29 and the elements used for the lottery are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to these. For example, a different lottery value may be assigned to each set value.

  In the battle CZ character lottery table shown in FIG. 29, for example, in the case of setting values 1 to 5, the friend character C is determined with a probability of 4096/32768, whereas in the case of setting value 6, 6554 The friend character C is determined with a probability of / 32768. Therefore, when the number of times the teammate character C is determined is large, it can be recognized that the possibility of the setting value 6 is high. The set value is a value indicating that the higher the value, the higher the degree of advantage to the player (the higher the payout rate). In this embodiment, for example, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the bonus combination will be determined as the internal winning combination, or the higher the set value, the higher the probability of transition to ART game. It shall be done.

<HP subtraction success / failure lottery table>
The HP subtraction success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 30 is referred to in the battle CZ processing to be described later in the description of FIG. 84, and during “Battle CZ”, character types (any of allied characters A to C) and an internal winning combination Are used to determine whether or not the teammate character performs an attack on the enemy character. Here, "HP" is an abbreviation of "hit point". It should be noted that, when the effect that the ally character attacks against the enemy character is performed, the enemy character's "HP" is subtracted, and when the enemy character's "HP" becomes "0" or less, it shifts to ART game. It becomes. That is, in FIG. 30 and FIGS. 31 to 37, which will be described later, “HP” is a specific numerical value for determining whether or not to give the privilege of transitioning to ART game which is advantageous to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the HP subtraction success / failure lottery table is not elected (that is, "HP" is not subtracted) based on the internal winning combination for each character type (any one of the allied characters A to C), or A lottery value is assigned such that any of the wins (ie, "HP" is subtracted) is determined. The lottery values assigned in FIG. 30 and the respective elements used for the lottery show one example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on set values.

<HP subtraction value lottery table>
The HP subtraction value lottery table for character A shown in FIG. 31, the HP subtraction value lottery table for character B shown in FIG. 32, and the HP subtraction value lottery table for character C shown in FIG. 33 are battle CZ described later in the description of FIG. Referred to in the middle processing, during "Battle CZ", the effect that the ally character attacks the enemy character is performed based on the character type (any one of the ally characters A to C) and the internal winning combination. When determined, it is used to determine a subtraction value (HP subtraction value) to be subtracted from "HP" accordingly.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the HP subtraction value lottery table is an HP subtraction of any of the HP subtraction values 5 to 60 P based on the internal winning combination for each character type (any one of the allied characters A to C). A lottery value is assigned so that the value is determined. In addition, each element used for the lottery value allocated in FIGS. 31-33 and a lottery shows an example, It is not restricted to this. For example, the lottery value assigned in one or a plurality of specific combinations (for example, "weak cherry" or "watermelon") may be different for each character type (any one of the ally characters A to C).

<Rip continuous HP subtraction success / failure lottery table>
The RIP continuous time HP subtraction success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 34 is referred to in the battle CZ processing to be described later in the description of FIG. 84, and during “Battle CZ”, character types (any of allied characters A to C); It is used to determine whether or not an effect is made that the teammate character attacks the enemy character based on the number of consecutive replays. Here, “rep series” has the same meaning as the number of times of continuous replay, and indicates the number of times that the replay role is continuously determined as the internal winning combination. In addition, since the replay combination is a winning combination that achieves a prize regardless of the stop operation timing of the player, it can be said that the "rep series" and the number of consecutive replays are the number of times the replay combination has won consecutively.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in the rep continuous HP subtraction success / failure lottery table, non-winning (that is, “HP” is not subtracted based on the number of times of continuous replay) for each character type (any of allied characters A to C). The lottery value is assigned such that either or) (or "HP" is subtracted) is determined. The lottery values assigned in FIG. 34 and the respective elements used for the lottery show an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on set values.

<Rip continuous HP subtraction value lottery table>
The HP subtraction value lottery table for the lip continuous character A shown in FIG. 35, the HP subtraction value lottery table for the lip continuous character B shown in FIG. 36, and the HP subtraction value lottery table for the lip continuous character C shown in FIG. This is referred to in the battle CZ processing to be described later in the description of FIG. 84, and the ally character is an enemy character based on the character type (any one of the ally characters A to C) and the replay continuous number during the “battle CZ”. It is used to determine a subtraction value (HP subtraction value) to be subtracted from "HP" accordingly when it is determined to perform an attacking attack.

  As shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the rep continuous HP subtraction value lottery table is any of HP subtraction values 5 to 60 P based on the number of times of replay continuation for each character type (any one of the ally characters A to C). The lottery value is assigned such that the HP subtraction value of is determined. The lottery values assigned in FIGS. 35 to 37 and the respective elements used for the lottery show an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to make the lottery value allocated in a specific number of consecutive replays (for example, “others”) different for each character type (any one of the ally characters A to C).

<At the time of ART winning in battle CZ ART game number addition success / fail lottery table>
Referring to FIG. 84 in the battle CZ in progress processing to be described later in the description of FIG. 84, it is determined that transition to ART game is made during “Battle CZ”, as indicated in FIG. In this case (ie, when “HP” becomes “0” or less ”), it is used to determine whether to add the number of ART games based on the number of lottery choices and the internal winning combination. Here, the “number of lottery possible” indicates a lottery period in which a lottery for shifting to ART game (that is, a subtraction lottery of “HP”) is performed during “battle CZ”.

  The number of times that the lottery can be made is a push order small combination (the value of the small combination / replay data pointer is “26” to “37”) or the RB medium small combination (the value of the small combination / replay data pointer is “45”) is internal When the winning combination is determined, “1” is added one by one, and when the number of lottery times becomes “5” or more, during the “Battle CZ”, a lottery for shifting to ART game (ie, “HP”) Subtractive drawing is not performed. That is, in the present embodiment, when shifting to "battle CZ", then, the push order small combination (the value of the data pointer for small combination and replay is "26" to "37"), or RB small and medium combination (small combination · A lottery for shifting to ART game with a period of time until the value of the replay data pointer is determined to be the internal winning combination of five times by accumulating “45”) (that is, a subtraction lottery of “HP”) Is configured to be performed.

  In addition, in the case of the pushing order small part (the values of the small part and replay data pointer are “26” to “37”), when the stop operation order is correct, the bell (ie, the stop operation timing) , The upper bells 1 to 4, the cross-up bell, or the middle bell) is a prize, and the RB middle and small winning combination (small play and replay data pointer value is “45”) is the player's stop operation. Regardless of the timing, the bells (i.e., cross-down bells 1 to 4, upper bells 1 to 4, cross-up bell, or middle bell) are to be won. Therefore, it may be said that the lottery possible number is the number of winnings of a specific combination (bell) in the BB gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the ART CIT during ART CIT during the battle CZ success / failure lottery table is not won (that is, the number of ART games is not added), or winning is based on the internal winning combination for each lottery possible number. A lottery value is assigned such that one of (that is, the number of ART games is added) is determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 38 and each element used for the lottery are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, different lottery values may be further assigned based on the number of games played in "Battle CZ". Specifically, if the number of times the lottery is possible is "four times", if the number of times of playing is less than "ten times", a lottery is performed with the lottery value as shown in FIG. 38, and the number of times of playing is "ten times" If it is the above, it is good also as allocating a lottery value so that a prize (namely, the number of ART games is added) will be determined at a higher probability than shown in FIG.

<Additional ART game number lottery table when ART won in battle CZ>
FIG. 39 shows the ART winning when ART winning during ART C # lottery table is referred to in the processing during battle CZ described later in the explanation of FIG. 84, and it is decided to shift to ART game during "battle CZ" In the case where it is determined that the number of ART games is to be added (ie, when “HP” becomes “0” or less ”), the number of ART games to be added (multiple) is based on the number of times the lottery is possible. Is used to determine the

  As shown in FIG. 39, the ART game number lottery table for ART winning in battle CZ is based on the number of lottery times allowed, and the ART game number (multiple) 2 to 5 times for the ART game number (multiple) The lottery value is assigned so that is determined. The additional ART game number (multiple) is used to determine how many times the initial value “50” of the ART game number is to be multiplied. For example, when "2 times" is determined as the additional ART game number (multiple), the initial value of the ART game number becomes "100 (50 x 2)", and "3 times as the additional ART game number (multiple) If "" is determined, the initial value of the number of ART games is "150 (50 x 3)", and if "4 times" is determined as the number of ART games (multiple) to be added, When the initial value is “200 (50 × 4)” and “5 times” is determined as the additional ART game number (multiple), the initial value of the ART game number is “250 (50 × 5)” . However, the lottery value assigned in FIG. 39 and each element used for the lottery show an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of ART games to be directly added may be determined based on the number of times the lottery is possible, as in the battle CZ-plus-ART game number lottery table described later in the description of FIG.

<The number of ART games added during battle CZ success / failure lottery table>
FIG. 40 shows that the ART C ++ ART game number addition success / failure lottery table is referred to in the battle CZ middle processing described later in the explanation of FIG. 84, and it is decided to shift to ART game during "Battle CZ" (ie, , And after "HP" becomes "0" or less), it is used to determine whether to add the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination until "Battle CZ" is over.

  As shown in FIG. 40, in the battle CZ, the ART game number addition success / failure lottery table is not elected (that is, the ART game number is not added) or elected (that is, the ART game number is added) based on the internal winning combination. The lottery value is assigned such that one of them is determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 40 and each element used for the lottery are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, different lottery values may be further assigned based on the number of games played in "Battle CZ". Specifically, if the number of games is less than "20 times", a lottery is performed according to the lottery value as shown in FIG. 40, and if the number of games is "20 times" or more, it is higher than that shown in FIG. A lottery value may be assigned such that the probability of winning (that is, the number of ART games added) is determined.

<Battle CZ medium addition ART game number lottery table>
When the battle CZ during addition processing shown in FIG. 84 is referred to in the battle CZ during processing to be described later in FIG. , When "HP" becomes "0" or less), and it is determined that the number of ART games is to be added, it is used to determine the number of ART games to be added based on the internal winning combination. Be

  As shown in FIG. 41, in the battle CZ medium addition ART game number lottery table, the drawing value is set so that any one of the increase ART game numbers 5 to 300 games is determined based on the internal winning combination. It is assigned. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 41 and each element used for the lottery are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, similarly to the ART winning number ART game number lottery table in the battle CZ shown in FIG. 39, the number (multiple) of the ART games may be determined on the basis of the internal winning combination.

<Card acquisition success lottery table>
The card acquisition success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 42 is referred to in the processing during normal BB described later in the description of FIG. 85, and is used during “item CZ” described later based on the internal winning combination during “normal BB”. Is used to determine whether or not to obtain an item. Here, in the present embodiment, although an example of an item is described using a “card”, the present invention is not limited to this, and includes all modes in which a player can recognize a plurality of items. For example, it may indicate an ornament (equipment) of the ally character, or may indicate a jewel. In addition, in "item CZ" to be described later, a lottery for whether or not to shift to ART game is performed over the number of games according to the number of items acquired in "in the middle of BB". It will be migrated. That is, in FIG. 42 and FIGS. 42 to 49 described later, the “card” is a lottery right for a lottery of whether or not to shift to the ART game which is an advantageous state for the player. The flow of the game regarding “normal BB” will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the card acquisition success / failure lottery table is either non-winning (that is, does not acquire a "card") or is won (that is, acquires a "card") based on the internal winning combination. Lottery values are assigned to be determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 42 and each element used for the lottery are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on set values.

<Card type lottery table>
The card type lottery table shown in FIG. 43 is referred to in the processing during normal BB to be described later in the description of FIG. 85, and is used to determine the card type based on the internal winning combination during “normal BB”. In the present embodiment, seven card types “LV1 card” to “LV7 card” are provided, and when acquired, display contents displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 and “described later” The item “CZ” is configured to be different in the expectation degree of winning in the lottery whether or not to shift to the ART game. That is, "LV (level)" indicates the degree of expectation as to whether or not to shift to ART game, which is an advantageous state for the player.

  "LV 1 card" has the lowest expectation of whether or not to shift to ART game, and when it is acquired, a card on which one star is described is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 accordingly. . The degree of expectation of whether or not the “LV 7 card” shifts to the ART game is the highest, and when acquired, a card in which seven stars are described is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 accordingly. That is, the higher the “LV (level)”, the higher the degree of expectation of whether or not to shift to ART gaming, and the display according to the degree of expectation will be made.

  As shown in FIG. 43, in the card type lottery table, lottery values are assigned such that one of the cards “LV1 card” to “LV7 card” is determined based on the internal winning combination. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 43 and each element used for the lottery are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lottery value to be assigned may be made different based on the number of lottery possibilities.

<Rip continuous card acquisition success or failure lottery table>
The rep continuous card acquisition success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 44 is referred to in the processing during normal BB described later in the description of FIG. 85, and during “normal BB”, during “item CZ” described later based on the number of times of replay continuation. It is used to decide whether to acquire the item used for The “rip continuous” and the number of times of continuous replay are the same as those in FIG. 34, so the description will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 44, the rep continuous card acquisition success lottery table is not elected (ie, does not acquire a “card”) or elected (ie, acquires a “card”) based on the number of consecutive replays. A lottery value is assigned so that one is determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 44 and each element used for the lottery are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on set values.

<Rip continuous card type lottery table>
The rep continuous card type lottery table shown in FIG. 45 is referred to in the processing during normal BB to be described later in the description of FIG. 85, and is used to determine the card type based on the number of consecutive replays during “normal BB”. Be

  As shown in FIG. 45, in the rep continuous card type lottery table, lottery values are assigned such that one of the cards “LV1 card” to “LV7 card” is determined based on the number of times of replay continuously. . The lottery values assigned in FIG. 45 and the respective elements used for the lottery show an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lottery value to be assigned may be made different based on the number of lottery possibilities.

<Normal BB during ART game number addition success / failure lottery table>
The normal BB during ART game number addition success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. 46 is referred to in the normal BB during processing described later in the explanation of FIG. 85, and it is decided to shift to ART game during “normal BB” (ie, To determine whether to add the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination until “normal BB” ends after “the number of cards” becomes “8 or more” as described later. Used for

  As shown in FIG. 46, the normal BB during ART game number addition success / failure lottery table is not won (that is, the ART game number is not added) or won (that is, the ART game number is added) based on the internal winning combination. The lottery value is assigned such that one of them is determined. The lottery values assigned in FIG. 46 and the respective elements used for the lottery show an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the number of games in “normal BB”. Specifically, if the number of games is less than "20 times", a lottery is performed with the lottery value as shown in FIG. 46, and if the number of games is "20 times" or more, it is higher than that shown in FIG. A lottery value may be assigned such that the probability of winning (that is, the number of ART games added) is determined.

<Normal BB extra charge ART game number lottery table>
When the normal BB middle lottery process shown in FIG. 47 is referred to in the normal BB middle processing described later in the description of FIG. If the "number of cards" is "8" or more, as will be described later, and it is determined that the number of ART games is to be added, the number of ART games to be added is determined based on the internal winning combination. Is used to determine the

  As shown in FIG. 47, in the normal BB added ART game number lottery table, the lottery value is set such that the added ART game number of any of the added ART game number 5 to 300 is determined based on the internal winning combination. It is assigned. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 47 and each element used for the lottery are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, similarly to the ART winning number ART game number lottery table in the battle CZ shown in FIG. 39, the number (multiple) of the ART games may be determined on the basis of the internal winning combination.

<Card overtime ART game number lottery table>
The card extra time ART game number lottery table shown in FIG. 48 is referred to in the processing during the normal BB described later in the description of FIG. 85, and it is determined to shift to the ART game during “normal BB” (ie, As described later, when "the number of cards" becomes "8" or more), cards not used in "item CZ" described later (that is, in this case, "8 or more surplus cards") It is used to make a lottery for the number of remaining cards based on the card type and to determine the number of ART games to be added.

  Further, the card extra time ART game number lottery table shown in FIG. 48 is referred to in the processing during the item CZ described later in the explanation of FIG. 86, and it is decided to shift to ART game during “item CZ”. (That is, when winning an ART lottery executed based on a card type and an internal winning combination as described later), a card not used in the “item CZ” (for example, in “normal BB”) If 5 cards have been acquired and an ART lottery based on the first card is won in the "Item CZ", the remaining cards are based on the card type of the "4" remaining cards). It is used to make a lottery for the number of and determine the number of ART games to be added.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the lottery table for ART game number lottery table for extra cards is assigned a lottery value so that the number of ART games for the addition ART game number between 5 and 300 is determined based on the card type. It is done. In addition, as shown in FIG. 48, the card excess drawing ART game number lottery table is drawn such that the number of additional ART games to be determined increases as the expectation of the excess card ("LV (level)") increases. A value has been assigned. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 48 and each element used for the lottery are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, different lottery values may be assigned according to the internal winning combination in the unit game in which the remaining card is generated, the number of games, the number of lottery times, and the like.

<Item CZ ART lottery table>
The ART lottery table in the item CZ shown in FIG. 49 is referred to in the processing in the item CZ described later in the description of FIG. 86, and in the “item CZ”, based on the card type of the card acquired in the “normal BB”. It is used to decide whether or not to shift to ART game. As described above, the ART lottery table in the item CZ is configured such that the higher the “LV (level)” of the card, the higher the probability of shifting to ART gaming. In addition, the flow of the game regarding "item CZ" will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the ART lottery table in the item CZ is not won (that is, it does not shift to the ART game) or won for each card type (any of LV1 to LV7 cards) based on the internal winning combination. A lottery value is assigned such that one of them (that is, transition to ART game) is determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 49 and each element used for the lottery are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the number of item CZ games (that is, the number of cards) described later.

  In addition, the ART lottery table in the item CZ shown in FIG. 49 is “weak cherry” (corresponding to the winning number “77” in the internal gaming table for the general gaming state shown in FIG. 16), “strong cherry” as the type of internal winning combination. (Corresponds to the winning number "78" in the general gaming state internal lottery table shown in FIG. 16), "watermelon" (corresponds to the winning number "80" in the general gaming state internal lottery table shown in FIG. 16), "chance "Eye 1" and "Chance 2" (corresponding to the winning numbers "81" and "82" in the general gaming state internal lottery table shown in FIG. 16), "BAR complete Lip" and "Bonus overlapping role" (FIG. 16) The winning numbers “63” and “2”, “4” to “11”, “13” to “20”, “22” to “29”, “31” to “31” in the internal gaming state general lottery table shown Corresponds to 8 "), and" other "(more winning numbers and the gaming mode internal lottery table for that shown in Figure 16 corresponds to the" loss ") is defined.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the winning probability of the replay combination in the BB gaming state is configured to be inherited to the general gaming state after the BB gaming state ends. That is, "Item CZ" is a replay low probability state (low RT gaming state) RT0 gaming state (and RT1 gaming state shifted from this RT0 gaming state or RT2 gaming state), or a replay high probability state (high) It may be executed in both of RT2 gaming state, which is RT gaming state). However, if "JAC" is internally won during "Normal BB", that effect will be reported, so basically, if the player performs the stop operation at the stop operation timing not to win "JAC", basically "Item CZ" will be executed in the RT2 gaming state. However, when the player performs the stop operation at the stop operation timing of winning "JAC", the "item CZ" is executed in the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state.

  In addition, during the "item CZ" executed in the RT2 gaming state which is the replay high probability state (high RT gaming state), a stop operation for not shifting to the RT1 gaming state which is the replay low probability state (low RT gaming state) If the player performs a stop operation according to the procedure of the stop operation notified, the RT2 gaming state is basically maintained during the “item CZ”. However, when the player does not perform the stop operation according to the notified procedure of the stop operation, the "item CZ" may shift from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

  Therefore, in the ART lottery table in the item CZ shown in FIG. 49, an internal winning combination (for example, “RT2 maintenance lip”) determined with high probability in the RT2 gaming state which is the replay high probability state (high RT gaming state), Replay low probability state (low RT gaming state) RT0 gaming state which is determined with high probability in RT1 gaming state, or define an internal winning combination (for example, "loss") determined with high probability as the type of the same internal winning combination, The probability of shifting to a game is defined to be the lowest compared to other types of internal winning combinations.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the predetermined lottery state (for example, during “item CZ”) in which the lottery for determining whether to shift to a gaming state (for example, ART gaming) advantageous to the player is performed is replayed. Transition may occur in any of the high probability state (for example, RT2 gaming state) and the replay low probability state (for example, RT0 gaming state or RT1 gaming state), but a common lottery table in any of the gaming states It is possible to perform the lottery using (for example, the ART lottery table in the item CZ shown in FIG. 49).

  By configuring in this manner, the number of lottery tables used in a predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ) in which it is determined whether or not to shift to a gaming state (for example, ART game) advantageous to the player is reduced. It is possible to prevent the storage area (for example, the storage area of the ROM cartridge substrate 86) from being compressed. In addition, even when the player intentionally shifts from the replay high probability state to the replay low probability state, since it is not possible to receive an advantageous lottery by it, a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, , ART game) can be drawn appropriately.

<HP during HP subtraction success / failure lottery table>
The HP subtraction during HP successful drawing table shown in FIG. 50 is referred to in the processing during addition BB described later in the explanation of FIG. 82, and the enemy type (any one of enemy characters A to D) and the inside during “addition BB” Based on the winning combination, it is used to determine whether or not the teammate character performs an attack on the enemy character. Note that as the ally character attacks against the enemy character, the enemy character's "HP" is subtracted, and when the enemy character's "HP" becomes "0" or less, the number of ART games is increased. Transition to a special superimposed state. That is, in FIG. 50 and FIGS. 51 to 54 to be described later, “HP” is a specific additional state (special additional state) for adding the number of ART game play (number of ART games) which is advantageous to the player. It is a specific numerical value for deciding whether to give the privilege of transitioning to.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the HP under-subtraction success / failure lottery table in ART is not won (that is, "HP" is not subtracted) based on the internal winning combination for each enemy type (any of enemy characters A to D). A lottery value is assigned such that either winning or winning (that is, "HP" is subtracted) is determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 50 and each element used for the lottery are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on set values.

<Art during HP subtraction value lottery table>
The HP subtraction value lottery table in ART shown in FIG. 51 is referred to in the processing during the addition BB which will be described later in the description of FIG. 82, and the enemy type (any of enemy characters A to D) and the inside during “addition BB”. In order to determine a subtraction value (HP subtraction value) to be subtracted from “HP” when it is determined that the teammate character performs an attack on the enemy character based on the winning combination. Used.

  As shown in FIG. 51, a lottery value is assigned to the HP subtraction value lottery table during ART such that any one of the HP subtraction values of the HP subtraction values 5 to 60 P is determined based on the internal winning combination. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 51 and each element used for the lottery are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, different lottery values may be allocated at least in part for each enemy type (any one of the enemy characters A to D).

<Rep continuous time ART during HP subtraction success / failure lottery table>
Referring to FIG. 52, the HP subtraction success / failure HP lottery table during rep continuous ART is referred to in the processing during the addition BB to be described later in the description of FIG. 82, and the enemy type (one of enemy characters A to D) during the “addition BB”. It is used to determine whether or not the teammate character performs an attack on the enemy character based on the number of consecutive replays. The “rip continuous” and the number of times of continuous replay are the same as those in FIG. 34, so the description will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the rep continuous HP subtraction success / failure lottery table does not win based on the number of times of replay continuously for each enemy type (one of the enemy characters A to C or the enemy character D). A lottery value is assigned such that either "HP" is not subtracted) or winning (ie, "HP" is subtracted) is determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 52 and each element used for the lottery are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on set values.

<Rep continuous time ART during HP subtraction value lottery table>
In the ART continuous subtraction HP lottery value lottery table for the lip continuous enemy A to C shown in FIG. 53 and the HP subtraction special value lottery table for the lip continuous enemy D for ART shown in FIG. 54, in the additional BB described later in the description of FIG. It is referred to in the processing, and it is determined that the effect that the teammate character attacks the enemy character is performed based on the enemy type (any one of the enemy characters A to D) and the number of times of replay continuously during the “add BB”. When used, it is used to determine a subtraction value (HP subtraction value) to be subtracted from “HP” accordingly.

  As shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, the HP subtraction value lottery table during rep continuous ART is HP based on the number of times of continuous replay for each enemy type (any one of the enemy characters A to C or the enemy character D). A lottery value is assigned such that any of HP subtraction values of subtraction values 5 to 60 P is determined. The lottery values assigned in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54 and the respective elements used for the lottery show an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to make the lottery value allocated in a specific number of consecutive replays (for example, “others”) different for each enemy type (any one of the enemy characters A to C).

<ART number of games plus lottery for winning prize lottery table>
When the bell game number lottery table for ART game number addition lottery shown in FIG. 55 is referred to in the processing during the item CZ described later in the explanation of FIG. 86, and it is decided to shift to ART game in “item CZ” It is used to determine the “number of bell prizes” for lottery with the addition of the number of ART games (that is, when an ART transition lottery based on a card type and an internal winning combination is won). Here, the "number of bell prizes" indicates the number of prizes of bells in the ART game (that is, any of crossdown bells 1 to 4, upper bells 1 to 4, cross up bell, or middle bell). In addition, in FIGS. 55-57, it changes to "the number of bell prize winnings", and selects the number of winnings of a bell (that is, any of crossdown bells 1 to 4, upper bells 1 to 4, cross up bell or middle bell) It is also possible to use "the number of bell wins" shown.

  Further, the ART game number additional drawing for lottery lottery winnings lottery table shown in FIG. 55 is referred to in the processing during normal gaming described later in the description of FIG. 87, and it is decided to shift to ART gaming during "normal gaming". In this case (for example, when the winning combination "BAR complete lip" is won), it is used to determine the number of bell winnings for lottery for adding the number of ART games.

  Also, the ART game number additional lottery bell prize number lottery table shown in FIG. 55 is referred to in the processing at the time of prize operation command reception described later in the explanation of FIG. 88, and the bell prize number in the "ART game" is determined. It is used to determine the number of bell prizes again when the number of bell prizes is reached.

  Also, the ART game number additional lottery bell prize number lottery table shown in FIG. 55 is referred to in the bonus end command reception process described later in the description of FIG. 89, and when the PBB gaming state is ended, “Battle CZ” is ended. When it is decided to shift to ART at the time, and when it is decided to shift to ART at the end of “normal BB”, the number of bell prizes for drawing the number of ART games is decided. Used to

  As shown in FIG. 55, in the ART game number-added lottery bell prize number lottery table, lottery values are assigned such that one of the bell prize numbers 1 to 20 is determined. The lottery values assigned in FIG. 55 and the respective elements used for the lottery show an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a different lottery value may be assigned to each transition opportunity determined to transition to ART.

<When the number of bells has reached the number of ART games added success / failure lottery table>
When the number of times of bell prize arrival shown in FIG. 56 is reached, the ART game number addition success / failure lottery table is referred to in the processing at the time of prize operation command reception described later in the description of FIG. It is used to decide whether or not to add the number of ART games when the number of bell prizes reached is reached.

  As shown in FIG. 56, when the number of bell prizes is reached, the ART game number addition success / failure lottery table is either non-winning (that is, ART game number is not added) or winning (that is, ART game number is added). The lottery value is assigned so that is determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 56 and each element used for the lottery are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on the number of games played during "ART game". Also, for example, as described above, different lottery values may be assigned to each transition opportunity determined to transition to ART.

<The number of bell prize arrivals addition ART game number lottery table>
The winning ART game number lottery table shown in FIG. 57 is referred to in the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command described later in the explanation of FIG. 88, and the number of bell winning times during “ART game” is determined. It is used to determine the number of ART games to be added when it is determined that the number of bell games has been reached and the number of ART games is to be added.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the lottery ART game number lottery table at the time of reaching the number of times of bell winning is assigned a lottery value so that the number of the ART games of the addition ART game number 5 to 300 is determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 57 and each element used for the lottery are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of ART games to be added (multiples) may be determined to determine how many times the number of ART games to be played is determined to be added. In this case, if "one" is determined as the number of bell wins and "five times" is determined as the number of ART games (multiple), the number of ART games for five games is added, but the bell wins. If “20 times” is determined as the number of times and “5 times” is determined as the number of ART games (multiple) to be added, the number of ART games for 100 games will be added. Even when the number of times is determined, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation.

<ART mode transition lottery table>
The ART in progress mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 58 is referred to in the ART in game processing to be described later in the description of FIG. 81, and in ART game, a mode (normal mode or preferential) in ART game based on the internal winning combination. Mode) is used to determine the mode. The "preferential mode" is a specific mode in which the probability that the number of ART games added in the special additional state continues (or is won) is higher than that in the "normal mode".

  As shown in FIG. 58, the ART mode transition lottery table is a transition destination mode (normal mode or preferential mode) based on the internal winning combination for each current mode (either the normal mode or the preferential mode). The lottery value is assigned so that any one of. The lottery values assigned in FIG. 58 and the respective elements used for the lottery show an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as in the case of the normal medium mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 59, an internal winning combination other than a bell (that is, any of crossdown bells 1 to 4, upper bells 1 to 4, cross up bell, or middle bell) A mode transition lottery may be performed also when it is determined.

<Normal mode transition lottery table>
The normal mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 59 is referred to in the normal game processing which will be described later in the description of FIG. 87, and the mode (normal mode or battle) in the normal game based on the internal winning combination during the normal game. Mode) is used to determine the mode. The "battle mode" is a specific mode for causing the BB gaming state to shift to the "battle CZ" when BB1 to BB4 are internally won during the normal game.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the normal mode transition lottery table is a transition destination mode (normal mode or battle mode) for each current mode (either the normal mode or the battle mode) based on the internal winning combination. The lottery value is assigned so that any one of. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 59 and each element used for the lottery are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, different lottery values may be assigned according to the current number of ceiling games.

<ART end mode transition lottery table>
The ART end time mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 60 is referred to in the ART game end check process described later in the description of FIG. 83, and the first mode (normal mode or battle mode) in normal game at the end of ART game. Is used to determine the

  As shown in FIG. 60, lottery values are assigned to the ART end mode transition lottery table so that the mode of the transition destination (either the normal mode or the battle mode) is determined. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 60 and each element used for the lottery are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, different lottery values may be assigned based on set values.

<Present game number lottery table at BB win>
The BB winning precursor game number lottery table shown in FIG. 61 is referred to in the normal game processing described later in the description of FIG. 87, and the internal lottery result is notified when the BB1 to BB4 are internally won during the normal game. It is used to determine the number of precursor games before being played. Although illustration is omitted, continuous effects are executed so as to continue the player's sense of expectation after BB 1 to 4 are internally elected and before the internal lottery result is notified. That is, it can be said that the "number of prognostic games" indicates the number of games in which the continuous effect is executed. Therefore, even if BB1 to BB4 are not internally winning, a specific internal winning combination determined as an internal winning combination overlapping with BB1 to BB4 (for example, normal lip 1, unquestionable bell, weak cherry, strong) If Cherry, Chance 1, Chance 2, Middle Cherry, or Watermelon) is determined to be the internal winning combination, the number of precursor games is determined, and continuous rendering is performed according to the number of precursor games determined. It is good also as execution. In this case, it is notified that BB1 to BB4 have not been internally won in the final game of the continuous effect.

  As shown in FIG. 61, a lottery value is assigned such that a prognostic game number of any of prognostic game number 0 to 5 is determined based on the internal winning combination, in the BB winning prognostic game number lottery table. There is. Here, when the precursor game number is “0 game”, the continuous effect is not executed, and the internal lottery result is notified in the game in which BB1 to BB4 are internally elected. The lottery value assigned in FIG. 60 and each element used for the lottery are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, different lottery values may be assigned according to the current number of ceiling games. Specifically, when BB1 to BB4 are internally elected when the number of ceiling games is "496", the number of precursor games for which the number of ceiling games is "500" or more (for example, 4 games or 5 games) It is also possible to assign a lottery value so that is determined with a higher probability than that shown in FIG. That is, while the number of ceiling games reaches the specified number of games (for example, "500"), when the bonus combination is internally won, it is easy to determine the number of precursor games with the number of ceiling games equal to or more than the specified number You may do it. By configuring in this manner, even if the bonus combination is internally won immediately before the ceiling function is activated (in this embodiment, "Battle CZ" is decided), the player is provided with a benefit from the ceiling function. Since it is possible to do so, it becomes possible to maintain the interest of the player's game.

[Flow of game of pachislot machine]
Next, the flow of the game of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of gaming in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

  First, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as a state in which a player plays a game, the ART game which is an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player and the normal gaming state relatively disadvantageous than the ART game are It is divided roughly into a regular game.

<Normal game>
The transition from the normal game to the ART game is winning or winning the “PBB”, the end of the PBB gaming state, meeting the transition condition to the ART game during the “Battle CZ” (CZ success), “Item In CZ, it will be carried out triggered by having met the transition condition to ART game (CZ success) and having won "BAR complete Lip". Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted in FIG. 62, it will transfer to ART game also when having satisfy | filled the transition conditions to ART game in "normal BB." Also, as described above, “PBB” and “BAR complete rep” are finalized roles that the transition to ART gaming is finalized.

<PBB>
In the normal game, when "PBB" which is a bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the transition to ART game is decided, an initial value (50) of the number of ART games is given, and a lottery of the number of ART sets is made Is done. After that, when “PBB” wins and shifts to the PBB gaming state, a lottery for adding the number of ART games is performed for each unit game until the PBB gaming state ends. Then, when the PBB gaming state ends, the ART game is started based on the number of ART games in which the result of the addition lottery is added to the initial value (50) of the number of ART games. Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 62, the same control is performed when “PBB” is determined as the internal winning combination in the ART game. That is, the number of ART games obtained by adding the result of the addition lottery to the initial value (50) of the number of ART games is given as the number of additional games.

<Battle CZ>
In the normal game, when any of “BB1 to BB4” which is a bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination, it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied. Here, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the “specific condition” is satisfied based on whether or not the “battle mode lock flag” described later is on. "Battle mode lock flag" is the number of ceiling games (that is, the prescribed number of games played in the normal game without shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player (ART gaming, BB gaming state)) (500 games) or is turned on when any of "BB 1 to 4" is determined as an internal winning combination during staying in the "battle mode" in the normal game. When the "battle mode lock flag" is on, the BB gaming state (RT0 gaming state during BB, RT2 gaming state during BB, or RB gaming state during BB) is controlled to "battle CZ".

  During the battle CZ, a battle effect in which an ally character and an enemy character battle is executed, and as described above, the enemy character's "HP" subtraction lottery is performed, and the enemy character is executed before the BB gaming state ends. When the "HP" of the becomes "0" or less, the CZ is successful, and it is shifted to the ART game after the BB gaming state is over. On the other hand, if the BB gaming state ends before the enemy character's “HP” becomes “0” or less, the CZ fails, an initial value (0) of the number of ceiling games is set, and the normal game is returned.

<Normal BB>
In the normal game, when any of "BB 1 to 4" which is a bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied (that is, the "battle mode lock flag" is off) The BB gaming state (RT0 gaming state during BB, RT2 gaming state during BB, or RB gaming state during BB) is controlled to “normal BB”.

  In normal BB, a card acquisition effect as to whether or not the teammate character acquires a card is executed, and as described above, a card acquisition lottery is performed. When the number of cards acquired before the end of the BB gaming state is “8” or more, the transition to the ART gaming is made after the end of the BB gaming state. On the other hand, when the BB gaming state ends before the number of cards reaches "8" or more, the processing shifts to item CZ after the BB gaming state ends. In normal BB (more specifically, during the RT0 gaming state during BB), “JAC” is drawn with high probability (see FIG. 17), and when “JAC” is won, it is assumed that one card can always be obtained ((1) See Figure 42). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent transition to the item CZ when the number of cards is zero. Although the possibility is extremely small, when the BB gaming state ends with the number of cards being zero, it is possible to shift to ART gaming after the BB gaming state ends.

<Item CZ>
In the normal BB, if the BB gaming state ends before the number of cards reaches "8" or more, the general gaming state (RT2 gaming state or RT0 gaming state) after the BB gaming state ends is "Item CZ Controlled by Item CZ is normally executed for the number of cards acquired in BB (ie, for the number of item CZ games), and ends when the number of cards becomes “0” (ie, the number of item CZ games is “0”) .

  In the item CZ, an effect corresponding to the type of the acquired card (for example, an effect having a low degree of expectation in the case of “LV1 card”, an effect having a high degree of expectation in the case of “LV7 card”) is executed, and As described above, the transition lottery to the ART game is performed with the degree of expectation according to the type of card. If you win the transition lottery to ART before all the acquired cards are used, it becomes a CZ success, and the lottery for adding the number of ART games according to the remaining cards is performed, and the initial value of the number of ART games ( The ART game is started based on the number of ART games in which the result of the additional drawing is added to 50). On the other hand, when all the cards acquired without winning the transition lottery to ART are used, the CZ fails, the initial value (0) of the number of ceiling games is set, and the normal game is returned.

<ART game>
When transitioning to the ART game, the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is informed until the ART game number and the ART set number become “0”. The player can increase the medals by performing the stop operation according to the notification. In addition, when the number of ART games and the ART set are "0", the mode (normal mode or battle mode) in the normal game is determined, and the initial value (0) of the number of ceiling games is set, and the normal game is returned .

(Additional BB)
In the ART game, when any of "BB 1 to 4" which is a bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a BB gaming state (RT0 gaming state in BB, RT2 gaming state in BB, or RB gaming state in BB) is It is controlled to "Overlay BB".

  In the additional BB, a battle effect in which an ally character and an enemy character battle is executed, and, as described above, a subtraction lottery of the enemy character "HP" is performed, and the enemy character is killed before the BB gaming state ends. When "HP" becomes "0" or less, it shifts to the special additional state after the end of the BB gaming state. On the other hand, when the BB gaming state ends before the enemy character's "HP" becomes "0" or less, the game returns to the ART gaming after the BB gaming state ends.

(Special addition status)
In the additional BB, if the enemy character's "HP" becomes "0" or less before the BB gaming state ends, the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state to RT3 gaming state) after the BB gaming state ends is " It is controlled to "specially added state". In the special addition state, for example, similarly to the PBB gaming state, an addition lottery for the number of ART games is performed for each unit game until the special addition state ends. In addition, in the special addition state, a predetermined number of games (for example, 4 games) is set as one set, and a continuous lottery as to whether to continue the next set is performed at the start or end of one set. If the player wins, the additional lottery for ART game number is performed again during the next set, while if the result of the continuous lottery is non-winning, the special additional state ends, and the game returns to the ART game.

  In this embodiment, the bonus combination internally won in the ART game is BB1 or BB3 (that is, the same color bonus), or BB2 or BB4 (that is, the different color bonus), but internally won in the preferential mode In this case, if it is determined to shift to the special additional state in the subsequent additional BB, the lottery in the special additional state is controlled to the preferential state in which the "preferential" is made. In this preferential state, for example, the probability (“continuation rate”) of winning in the continuous lottery whether or not to continue the set in the special additional state is to be preferential (that is, the probability of winning is increased) . The mode of the preferential state is not limited to this. For example, in the ART game number addition lottery, a relatively large number of added ART game numbers may be easily determined, or when changing the number of continued games per set, the relatively long continued game number May be determined easily.

  Moreover, the aspect of the "continuance rate" is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of continuation rates (for example, 1%, 10%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 90%) predetermined at the time of transition (or when it is determined to transition) in the special overlay state In accordance with the determined continuation rate, it may be determined how many sets the special addition state is to be continued. In this case, in the preferential state, if a relatively high continuation rate is easily determined among the plurality of continuation rates, the lottery in the special additional state can be favored.

(Add bell number)
In the ART game, when the above-mentioned bell winning number reaches the number determined in advance, an additional lottery for the number of ART games is performed. It should be noted that the number of ART games added as a result of the addition of the number of bells is not immediately notified (ie, stocked) to the player, and is notified when the number of ART games becomes “0”. However, the number of ART games added by the number of bells may be notified to the player immediately (for example, a game which has reached a predetermined number of times or the next game).

  In addition, the aspect of the addition in ART game is not restricted to what was mentioned above. For example, in the above-described “special addition state” or “bell count addition”, a lottery may be performed to determine whether to add the ART set number instead of or together with the ART game number addition.

  In addition, in the ART game, the number of ART games (or the number of sets of ARTs) may be increased by an opportunity other than the above-described addition. For example, based on the internal winning combination, success or failure of the addition (whether or not to win) may be drawn, and if it is won, the number of ART games may be added. In this case, a specific winning combination in which the probability of being determined as an internal winning combination is lower than the “push order small winning combination” targeted for the “bell frequency addition” described above (for example, “in the ART lottery table in item CZ shown in FIG. When a bonus overlapping role, or "chance 1" and "chance 2" is determined as the internal winning combination, it may be added with a specific lottery probability (for example, 10923/32768 1/3 1/3) It may be determined.

  In addition, the "push order small part" that is the target of the "bell number addition" described above, and the "bonus overlap part" in the ART lottery table in the item CZ shown in FIG. The success or failure of the addition (whether or not to win) may be drawn based on a plurality of internal winning combinations including “1” and “chance 2”. However, in this case, the lottery probability is determined to be added when at least the "push order small part" to be subjected to the "bell number addition" described above is determined as the internal winning combination, It is desirable that the probability be lower than a specific lottery probability (for example, 32/32768 = 1/1024). Alternatively, if the "push order small part" to be subjected to the "bell number addition" described above is determined as the internal winning combination, success or failure (whether to win or not) of the addition based on the internal winning combination is not drawn It may be

  That is, in the present embodiment, the number of ART games (or the number of sets of ARTs) can be increased by a plurality of triggers of addition. By configuring in this way, it is more versatile with regard to the addition of the number of games (for example, the number of ART games) of the advantageous gaming state (for example, ART gaming) in which the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is informed. You can do a lottery.

[Main control processing]
Next, various types of processing executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Main control process>
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing main control processing. The main control process described below is started when the pachi-slot machine 1 is powered on.

  First, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is powered on, the main CPU 93 executes a power-on process shown in FIG. 64 (S10). In the power-on process, it is determined whether the backup is normal, whether the setting has been properly changed, and the like, and an initialization process according to the determination result is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes initialization processing at the end of one game (one unit game) (S11). In this initialization process, for example, a storage area designated in advance to be initialized at the end of one game is initialized. By this initialization process, data stored in the internal winning combination storing area and the display combination storing area of the main RAM 95 are cleared.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes medal acceptance / start check processing shown in FIG. 65 (S12). In the medal acceptance / start check process, a process of detecting a medal inserted by a player and a process of detecting a start operation are executed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 extracts random number values and stores them in the random number value storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (S13). In the present embodiment, the random number value is extracted from 0 to 65535.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes an internal lottery process shown in FIG. 66 (S14). The main CPU 93 which executes this internal lottery process constitutes an internal winning combination determination means.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes lock determination processing (S15). In this lock determination process, it is determined whether or not to perform the above-mentioned "lock".

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes reel stop initialization processing (S16). In the reel stop initial setting process, various stop control information of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R described above is stored in the corresponding area of the main RAM 95 based on the result of the internal lottery process (internal winning combination).

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated start command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (S17). The start command data is data for enabling the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as the type of internal winning combination, the type of gaming state, the type of lock and its period, and the bonus end number counter value.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a game start lock execution process (S18). In this game start time lock execution process, execution of the game start time lock and the execution of the reel action (representation by the variation mode of the reel) during the execution of the lock are performed based on the determination result of the lock determination process in S15. For example, when “PBB” is independently elected as the internal winning combination (winning number “1”), the game start lock is executed for about 30 seconds (“26853” as the value of the lock timer).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes wait processing (S19). In this weight processing, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the previous game start (the start of the last unit game), and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the predetermined time has elapsed The waiting time to wait until you are digested. The predetermined time in this weight processing, that is, the weight time, is set to, for example, 4.1 seconds from the start of the last unit game.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes reel rotation start processing for rotating all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (S20). Along with the reel rotation start processing, “01110000” is stored in the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 26). The reel rotation start control is executed by the interrupt process shown in FIG. 71 (more specifically, the reel control process shown in S324). This interrupt process is a process that is periodically executed every fixed period (1.1172 ms).

  By this interrupt processing, the drive of the stepping motor is controlled to start the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R becomes constant (for example, 80 rotations / 1 minute). It is accelerated until it reaches. Thereafter, when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R reaches a constant speed, the constant speed rotation is maintained. When the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R reaches a constant speed and the above-described reel index is detected, the stop operation to the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R is permitted.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates reel rotation start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated reel rotation start command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 S21). The reel rotation start command data is, for example, data for enabling the sub CPU 102 to recognize that the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R has been started.

  By receiving the reel rotation start command data, the sub control circuit 101 can recognize the reel rotation start, and can determine the timing and the like of executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a reel stop control process (S22). By this reel stop control processing, stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed. Although not shown, in the reel stop control process, the main CPU 93 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and generates the generated reel stop command data in the main RAM 95. Store in the allocated communication data storage area. The reel stop command data includes the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position (that is, the symbol position when the stop button is operated), and the number of sliding symbols or the planned stop position (that is, the reel actually stops). It is data for enabling the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as a symbol position).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a winning search process (S23). In this prize search process, after all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R have stopped, the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line is compared with the symbol combination table, and the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line is identified. Ru.

  Specifically, the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 23) and the data of the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 13 to 15) are collated, and if there is a match as a result of the collation The data corresponding to the matched symbol combination (display combination) is stored in the display combination storing area (see FIG. 22), and the payout number (disbursed number counter value) associated with the symbol combination is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes medal payout processing for paying out the number of medals according to the obtained payout number counter value as a result of the winning search processing (S24). In this medal payout process, medal payout and credit card number updating are performed based on the payout number counter value.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes state management processing shown in FIG. 67 (S25). In this state management process, transition control of the RT gaming state is mainly executed, and on / off of the output of the external signal from the external concentrated terminal plate 47 is managed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a game end lock execution process (S26). In the end-of-game lock execution process, execution of the end-of-game lock and execution of a reel action (representation by a variation aspect of the reel) is performed based on the determination result of the lock determination process in S15. For example, when "PBB" and "BAR complete fake" are dually won as the internal winning combination (winning number "2"), the game ends at about 27 seconds (the value of the lock timer is "24167") Locking is performed. In addition, when “PBB” wins, and when the PBB gaming state ends, the lock at the game end is executed for about 2 seconds (“1790” as the value of the lock timer), and “BB 1 to 4” is a winning If it is, and when the BB RT0 gaming state, the BB RT2 gaming state, or the BB RB gaming state is ended, the lock at the game end is executed for about 1 second (“895” as the value of the lock timer) When the "BB during RB" is won in the BB during the RT game state during BB, about 0.3 seconds (when the value of the lock timer is locked at the game end lock of "268" is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates winning operation command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated winning operation command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (S27) . The winning operation command data is, for example, data for enabling the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as the type of display combination and the number-of-payouts counter value.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes bonus end check processing shown in FIG. 69 (S28). In the bonus end check process, when each end condition (transition condition) defined in the BB gaming state is satisfied, a process according to the end condition (transition condition) is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a bonus operation check process shown in FIG. 70 (S29). In this bonus operation check process, when each start condition (transition condition) of the BB gaming state is satisfied in the normal gaming state, and when a start condition (transition condition) of the RB gaming state during BB is satisfied in the BB gaming state, Alternatively, when the operating condition for replay is satisfied in the normal gaming state and the BB gaming state, processing according to the start condition (transition condition) or the operating condition is executed. After executing the processing of step S29, the main CPU 93 returns to the processing of step S11.

<Power-on process>
FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing a power-on process executed in step S10 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether the backup is normal (S30). In this judgment processing, it is judged whether the backup is normal or not by error detection using a checksum value.

  For example, the main CPU 93 stores the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 and the check sum value calculated from the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 in the main RAM 95 as backup data, and the determination process at the time of power on (S30) , And reads the set value etc. and the checksum value stored in the main RAM 95.

  Then, the main CPU 93 compares the checksum calculated from the read setting value etc. with the checksum that has been backed up, and determines that the backup is normal if the comparison result matches.

  When the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the backed up setting values and the like in the main RAM 95 (S31). Thereby, when the backup is normal, the setting value before the power-off is set to the main RAM 95.

  After executing the processing of step S31, or when determining that the backup is not normal in step S30 (NO), the main CPU 93 is a setting change switch (setting key provided in the cabinet 2a of the pachislot machine 1) It is determined whether the mold switch 56) is on (S32). Here, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch (setting key type switch 56) is on (YES), the main CPU 93 executes initialization processing at the time of setting change (S33).

  In the initialization process at the time of the setting change, for example, data stored in the internal winning combination storing area, the display combination storing area, the symbol code storing area and the gaming state flag storing area of the main RAM 95 are cleared and Is cleared. Note that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area may or may not be cleared.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated initialization command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (S34) . The initialization command data is, for example, data for enabling the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as the presence or absence of a setting value change and the setting value.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes setting value change processing (S35). In this setting value changing process, the setting value is selected from among 1 to 6 in accordance with the operation result of the reset switch (not shown) provided in the cabinet 2a of the pachislot machine 1, and subsequently, The set value selected when the start lever 23 is operated is decided.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the setting change switch (setting key type switch 56) is in the on state (S36), and repeatedly executes the process of step S36 until the determination result is not obtained. .

  Here, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch (setting key type switch 56) is not in the on state (ie, when the setting change switch is turned off from on) (NO) The initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 is generated, and the generated initialization command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (S37). finish.

  In step S32, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch (setting key type switch 56) is not on (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether the backup is normal (S38). Here, when it is determined that the backup is not normal (NO), the main CPU 93 executes power-on error processing (S39).

  In the power-on error process, the main CPU 93 displays that the backup is not normal by an error display or the like. It should be noted that the main CPU 93 does not release the error state by the operation of the stop release switch (not shown) or the reset switch (not shown) in the error (backup error) state where the backup is not normal. The error state is canceled only when the setting is newly changed.

  If it is determined in step S38 that the backup is normal (YES), the main CPU 93 restores the state of the pachislot machine 1 to the state before the power failure based on the backup data stored in the main RAM 95. (S40), the power-on process ends.

<Medal acceptance and start check processing>
FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the medal acceptance / start check process executed in step S12 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is an automatic input request (S50). That is, it is determined whether or not a replay combination is won in the previous unit game.

  In step S50, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is an automatic insertion request (YES), the main CPU 93 executes automatic insertion processing for automatically inserting the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game (S51). Specifically, the main CPU 93 copies the automatic insertion counter to the insertion number counter and clears the automatic insertion counter.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95. A transmission process is performed (S52). Here, the medal insertion command data is data for enabling the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as the presence or absence of medal insertion, the value of the insertion number counter, and the value of the credit counter.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes an automatic insertion interval waiting process in order to set a replay activation recognition time for reliably operating replay in this unit game (S53). In this automatic insertion interval waiting process, “270” is set as an automatic insertion interval waiting time timer (270 interrupts × 1.1172 ms ≒ 301.64 ms). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the player plays a replay in the previous unit game, the replay activation recognition time is provided, and the processing relating to the automatic insertion is reliably performed.

  Note that the replay activation recognition time is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the replay operation recognition time may be configured to be different depending on the number of medals automatically inserted (for example, the value “1” to “3” of the automatic insertion counter). Specifically, when the number of automatically inserted medals is “1”, “90” is set as the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer, and the number of automatically inserted medals is “2”. If there is, set "180" as the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer, and if the number of automatically inserted medals is "3", set "270" as the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer. You may do it.

  In addition, an effect may be performed using this replay activation recognition time. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, in the RT0 gaming state during BB and the RT2 gaming state during BB, a bonus is to be awarded according to the number of consecutive winnings (the number of wins) of the replay combination. Therefore, in the RT0 gaming state during BB and the RT2 gaming state during BB, if the value of the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer is set according to the number of consecutive wins (number of wins) of the replay role, the lock is made every unit game Similarly, the effect of stopping the progress of the game (inactivating the operation of the player) is performed without performing the determination process (see S15 of FIG. 63) or the lock execution process at the game end (see S26 of FIG. 63). Is possible.

  Specifically, for example, in the RT0 gaming state during BB and the RT2 gaming state during BB, when the number of consecutive winnings (the number of wins) of the replay combination is 1 to 4 times, “270 as an automatic insertion interval waiting time timer If the number of consecutive winnings (number of winnings) of the replay player is 5 to 9, then "540" is set as an automatic insertion interval waiting time timer, and the number of consecutive winnings of the replay player (number of winnings) If the number is 11 to 14 times, "810" is set as the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer, and if the number of consecutive winnings (the number of winning) of the replay combination is 16 to 19, the automatic insertion interval wait is performed. If "1080" is set as the time timer and the number of consecutive winnings (the number of winnings) of the replay player is 10 times, 15 times, 20 times or more, "13" as the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer 0 "is set to.

  By configuring in this way, in a specific gaming state (for example, RT0 gaming state during BB and RT2 gaming state during BB), a predetermined benefit (for example, according to the number of consecutive winnings of a specific combination (for example, replay role)) When a card acquisition lottery to be described later is given, the same lock is performed without performing lock control (for example, lock determination processing and game end lock execution processing) for each game by using the replay operation recognition time. Since the effect can be performed, the lock effect can be performed without increasing the control load.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the value (for example, “268”) of the lock timer which is set when “RB during BB” wins is the minimum value (for example, “270 for which the replay operation recognition time is set. Less than). That is, the time during which the lock effect is executed when the “BB during RB” wins is configured to be shorter than the replay activation recognition time.

  By configuring in this manner, in a specific gaming state (for example, RT0 gaming state in BB and RT2 gaming state in BB), a benefit (for example, card acquisition described later) is obtained by the number of consecutive wins for a specific combination (for example, replay role) It is possible to make the player recognize by the execution time of the lock effect that the bonus becomes difficult to be awarded when the bonus) for which the lottery is performed is awarded.

  In step S50, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is no request for automatic insertion (NO), the main CPU 93 permits medal acceptance (S54). For example, the main CPU 93 drives a solenoid (not shown) of the selector 66 to form a route so that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 can pass through the inside of the selector 66.

  In step S50, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is an automatic insertion request (YES), the reception of medals is prohibited from the previous unit game, so processing related to the reception of medals is performed. Although it is not executed, the player may be permitted to accept medals even when the player plays a replay in the previous unit game.

  After the process of step S53 or S54 is executed, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted cards in the main RAM 95 in accordance with the game state (S55). In the present embodiment, 3 is set as the maximum value of the number of inserted sheets in any gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not acceptance of medals is permitted (S56). Here, when it is determined that the acceptance of medals is permitted (YES), the main CPU 93 checks the medal insertion to check whether the medal has been inserted properly or the operation to the BET button 22 has been performed. The process is executed (S57). In the medal insertion check process, when the medal is inserted properly or when the medal is inserted by the operation of the bet button 22 from the credit, the value of the inserted number counter according to the number of inserted medals, Or the value of the credit counter is updated.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95. The transmission process is executed (S58).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether medals can be inserted or credited (S59). In the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the insertion number counter is 3 and the value of the credit counter is 50 or that the automatic insertion process of step S51 is performed. When the condition is satisfied, it is determined that medal insertion or credit is not possible, and when the condition is not satisfied, it is determined that medal insertion or credit is possible.

  When it is determined in step S59 that the insertion of medals or the credit is not possible (NO), the main CPU 93 prohibits the reception of medals (S60). For example, the main CPU 93 forms a route so that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 is discharged from the medal payout opening 32 without driving the solenoid of the selector 66.

  If it is determined in step S56 that acceptance of medals is not permitted (NO), if it is determined in step S59 that medal insertion or credit is possible (YES), or after the process of step S60 is executed. The main CPU 93 determines whether the number of inserted medals is the number that can start the game (S61). That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 determines whether the number of medals inserted is 3 which is the maximum value.

  Here, if it is determined that the number of inserted medals is not the maximum value (NO), the main CPU 93 returns to the process of step S56. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of inserted medals is the maximum value (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether the start switch 79 is on (S62).

  Here, when it is determined that the start switch 79 is not on (NO), the main CPU 93 returns to the process of step S56. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start switch 79 is on (YES), the main CPU 93 prohibits medal acceptance (S63), and ends the medal acceptance / start check process.

<Internal lottery process>
FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing an internal lottery process executed in step S14 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table according to the game state in the main RAM 95 (S70). In the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 sets one of the internal lottery tables shown in FIG. 16 or 17 in the main RAM 95 in accordance with the gaming state.

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires random number values stored in the random number value storage area (S71). Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the predetermined area of the internal lottery table set in step S70, acquires one lottery value associated with each winning number of the corresponding setting value, and selects the lottery value from the random number value. Is subtracted (S72). That is, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not the internal winning combination associated with the winning number is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the subtraction result of the process of step S72 is less than 0 (S73). Here, when the main CPU 93 determines that the subtraction result is not less than 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 updates the random number value and the winning number (S74).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all the winning numbers in the internal lottery table being used have been checked (S75), and if it is determined that all the winning numbers have not been checked (NO) , And return to the process of step S72.

  On the other hand, when determining that all the winning numbers have been checked (YES), the main CPU 93 sets 0 as the value of the data pointer (S76). That is, the main CPU 93 determines "losing" as the internal winning combination.

  In step S73, when the main CPU 93 determines that the subtraction result is less than 0 (YES), the internal lottery table set in the main RAM 95 is referred to and the winning combination data pointer is selected from the winning combination and the replay data pointer. The value and the value of the bonus data pointer are acquired (S77).

  After executing the process of step S76 or S77, the main CPU 93 refers to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 18), and based on the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer, the main winning combination Is acquired (S78).

  In the process of step S78, the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combination / replay is referred to, and 16 bytes indicating the internal winning combination corresponding to the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer acquired in the processing of step S76 or S77. Data values are determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the data of the internal winning combination acquired in step S78 in the internal winning combination storage area (see FIG. 21) (S79). In the process of step S79, a 16-byte data value indicating the internal winning combination determined in the process of step S78 is stored in the internal winning combination storage areas 1-16.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the value of the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 24) is 0 (S80). When the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the carryover combination storage area is 0 (YES), it refers to the bonus internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 19), and internally based on the value of the bonus data pointer. The winning combination is obtained (S81).

  In the process of step S81, the bonus internal winning combination determination table is referred to, and a 16-byte data value indicating the internal winning combination corresponding to the value of the bonus data pointer acquired in the process of steps S76 or S77 is determined. Ru.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the internal winning combination acquired in step S81 in the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 24) (S82). In the process of step S82, for example, when "PBB" is acquired as the internal winning combination in step S81, bit 0 corresponding to "PBB" of the carryover storage area is set to "1".

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the value of the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 24) is 0 (S83). In the process of step S83, in step S82, it is determined whether "1" is set in any one of bits 0 to 5 of the carryover combination storage area.

  If it is determined in step S83 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether the internal winning combination is “PBB” or “BB1 to 4” (S84) ). Here, when the main CPU 93 determines that the internal winning combination is “PBB” or “BB1 to 4” (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT4 gaming state as the gaming state (S85). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets “1” to the RT4 gaming state flag, and clears the other RT gaming state flag to “0”.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the internal winning combination is not "PBB" or "BB 1 to 4" (that is, the internal winning combination is "BB in RB") (NO), the gaming state is in BB. The RT2 gaming state is set (S86). Specifically, the main CPU 93 sets “1” to the RT2 gaming state flag during BB, and clears “0” the RT0 gaming state flag during BB.

  If it is determined in step S80 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is not 0 (NO), if it is determined in step S83 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is 0 (YES), or the process of step S85 or step S86 After execution, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (S87), and ends the internal lottery process. That is, the main CPU 93 reflects the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area in the internal winning combination storing area, and determines the internal winning combination in the unit game.

<State management process>
FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the state management process executed in step S25 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is the PBB gaming state or the normal BB gaming state (that is, the gaming state in any of BB RT0 gaming state, BB RT2 gaming state, or BB middle RB gaming state). It is determined whether there is any (S100). If the main CPU 93 determines that the PBB gaming state or the normal BB gaming state (YES), the process proceeds to step S108.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not the PBB gaming state or the normal BB gaming state (NO), subsequently, whether or not the current gaming state is the RT4 gaming state, that is, the bonus combination (BB) It is determined whether or not the internal winning state of middle RB is excluded (S101). If the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (YES), the process proceeds to step S108.

  If the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state in the process of step S101 (NO), then, “RT1 transition lip 1 to 16” or “RT1 transition symbol 1 to 8” It is determined whether or not any symbol combination is displayed on the effective line (S102). If the main CPU 93 determines that a combination of symbols of “RT1 transition lip 1 to 16” or “RT1 transition symbol 1 to 8” is displayed on the activated line (YES), the gaming state is RT1. The game state is set (S103), and the process proceeds to step S108. Specifically, the RT1 gaming state flag is set to "1", and the other RT gaming state flags are cleared to "0".

  When the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of any of “RT1 transition lip 1 to 16” or “RT1 transition symbol 1 to 8” is not displayed on the effective line in the process of step S102 (NO Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the combination of any of the symbols “RT2 transition lip 1 and 2” is displayed on the effective line (S104). When the main CPU 93 determines that any combination of symbols of "RT2 transition lip 1 and 2" is displayed on the activated line (YES), the RT2 gaming state is set as the gaming state (S105), and the step is performed. It moves to the process of S108. Specifically, the RT2 gaming state flag is set to "1", and the other RT gaming state flags are cleared to "0".

  If the main CPU 93 determines that the symbol combination of “RT2 transition lip 1 and 2” is not displayed on the effective line in the process of step S104 (NO), “RT3 transition is subsequently made. It is determined whether or not any combination of symbols on the lips 1 and 2 "is displayed on the activated line (S106). The main CPU 93 sets the RT3 gaming state as the gaming state (S107) when it is determined that a combination of symbols of "RT3 transition lip 1 and 2" is displayed on the activated line (YES). It moves to the process of S108. Specifically, the RT3 gaming state flag is set to "1", and the other RT gaming state flags are cleared to "0".

  If the main CPU 93 determines that the symbol combination of “RT3 transition lip 1 and 2” is not displayed on the activated line in the process of step S106 (NO) or after the process of step S107, The external signal output management process described later in the description of FIG. 68 is executed (S108), and the state management process is ended.

<External signal output management process>
FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing the external signal output management process executed in step S108 of the state management process shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the external signal 1 functions as a signal for displaying on the external display unit etc. the number of winnings (number of winnings) of “PBB” and the fact that the PBB gaming state is being executed. Functions as a signal for displaying on the external display etc. that the number of winnings (the number of winnings) of "BB 1 to 4" (the number of winnings) and the normal BB gaming state is being executed. It functions as a signal to display the number of times and that the ART game is being performed on an external device or the like.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the combination of symbols of "PBB" is displayed on the effective line (S120). When the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of symbols of “PBB” is displayed on the activated line (YES), the external signal 1 is set to ON (S121), and the external signal output management process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of symbols of "PBB" is not displayed on the effective line (NO), subsequently, the combination of any of the symbols "BB 1 to 4" is an effective line It is determined whether it is displayed above (S122). When the main CPU 93 determines that any one of the symbol combinations “BB1 to 4” is displayed on the activated line (YES), the external signal 2 is set to ON (S123), and the external signal output management processing is performed. Finish.

  If the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of symbols “BB 1 to 4” is not displayed on the activated line in the process of step S 122 (NO), then, “PBB”, or “ It is determined whether BB1 to BB4 have been determined as internal winning combinations (S124). If it is determined that "PBB" or "BB 1 to 4" has been determined as the internal winning combination (YES), the processing proceeds to step S125, and "PBB" or "BB 1 to 4" is determined as the internal winning combination If it is determined that it is not (NO), the process proceeds to step S128.

  In the processing of step S125, the main CPU 93 sets an initial value “0” to the ART start check counter. The ART start check counter is data for enabling the main CPU 93 to recognize whether or not the ART game is being executed under the control of the sub CPU 102. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether the external signal 3 is on (S126). If it is determined that the external signal 3 is on (YES), the external signal 3 is turned off (S127), and the external signal output management process ends. Also, when it is determined that the external signal 3 is not on (that is, off) (NO), the external signal output management process is ended. That is, when the bonus combination is internally won during the ART game, the external signal 3 is turned off.

  In the processing of step S128, the main CPU 93 determines whether the current gaming state is the RT3 gaming state. If it is determined that the current gaming state is the RT3 gaming state (YES), an internal winning is subsequently made to either "left RT3 maintain lip", "medium RT3 maintain lip", or "right RT3 maintain lip". It is determined whether or not it has been made (S129). If it is determined that the player is not internally elected to "left RT3 maintenance rep", "middle RT3 maintenance rep", or "right RT3 maintenance rep" (NO), the external signal output management process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the player has been internally elected to “left RT3 maintenance lip”, “middle RT3 maintenance lip”, or “right RT3 maintenance lip” (YES), then the player's stop operation order is It is judged whether it is a predetermined specific pushing order (S130).

  Here, “predetermined specific push order” means a specific stop operation order in the stop operation order in which the RT3 gaming state is maintained. For example, if "left RT3 maintenance rep" is determined as the internal winning combination, if the first stop operation is the first stop left, the RT3 gaming state is regardless of the order of the second stop operation and the third stop operation. Although this is to be maintained (see FIG. 20), in the present embodiment, “right and left middle” of these is predetermined as a specific pressing order. Similarly, when "medium RT3 maintenance lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, "middle right and left" is determined in advance as a specific pushing order, and "right RT3 maintenance lip" is determined as the internal winning combination. The "right and left middle" is predetermined as a specific push order.

  When the main CPU 93 determines that the player's stop operation order is not a predetermined specific push order in the process of step S130 (NO), the ART start check counter is set to an initial value "0". The external signal output management process ends (S131). On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the player's stop operation order is the predetermined specific push order (YES), the ART start check counter is incremented by 1 (S132), and the ART start is subsequently started. It is determined whether the check counter is "2" (S133). If it is determined that the ART start check counter is "2" (YES), the external signal 3 is set on (S121), and the external signal output management process is ended. Also, when it is determined that the ART start check counter is not "2" (NO), the external signal output management process is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the specific replay high probability state (for example, the RT3 gaming state), the specific player (for example, “left RT3 maintenance lip”, “medium RT3 maintenance lip”, or “right RT3 maintenance lip” ") Is determined as an internal winning combination, a specific stop operation order (for example, a predetermined specific press) among the stop operation order in which a specific replay high probability state (for example, RT3 gaming state) is maintained In particular, based on the fact that the number of times the stop operation has been performed in a certain number of times (for example, twice) indicates that the game state (for example, ART game described later) advantageous to the player is being executed. It is configured to start output of a signal (for example, the external signal 3).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the ART game is started under the control of the sub CPU 102, a specific stop operation order (for example, a predetermined specific push order) is notified a specific number of times (for example, twice) Are configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately output the start of a gaming state (for example, an ART game described later) that is advantageous for the player to the outside.

  If the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is not the RT3 gaming state in the process of step S128 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether the external signal 3 is on (S135). If it is determined that the external signal 3 is not on (that is, off) (NO), the external signal output management process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the external signal 3 is on (YES), it is then determined whether or not the internal winning combination of the push order small combination has been made (S136). If it is determined that the internal winning combination has not been made to the push order small combination (NO), the external signal output management process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the internal winning combination of the push order small combination has been made (YES), it is then determined whether or not the medal has been paid out (S137). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a "drop-out" has occurred, when the internal winning combination has been made to the push order small combination.

  When the main CPU 93 determines that medals have been paid out (YES) in the process of step S137, the external signal output management process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the medal is not dispensed (NO), the external signal 3 is turned off (S138), and the external signal output management process is ended. That is, during the ART game (or after the end of the ART game), the external signal 3 is turned off when the player wins the push order small part and "dropout" occurs.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a specific signal (for example, the external signal 3) indicating that the gaming state (for example, ART gaming described later) which is advantageous for the player is being executed is output. When the internal winning combination is made for the push order small part but the medal is not paid out, the output of this specific signal is finished. By configuring in this way, the end of the gaming state (for example, the ART game described later) that is advantageous for the player can be appropriately output to the outside.

<Bonus end check processing>
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the bonus end check process executed in step S28 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is the PBB gaming state or the normal BB gaming state (that is, the gaming state in any of BB RT0 gaming state, BB RT2 gaming state, or BB middle RB gaming state). It is determined whether there is any (S150). When the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is not the PBB gaming state or the normal BB gaming state (NO), it ends the bonus end check process.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is the PBB gaming state or the normal BB gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 updates the value of the bonus end number counter based on the value of the payout number counter. (S151). Specifically, the number of medals paid out in the current game is subtracted from the bonus end number counter. Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the value of the bonus end number counter is less than 0 (S152). That is, it is determined whether the update result (subtraction result) by the process of step S151 is less than zero. If it is determined that the value of the bonus end sheet counter is not less than 0 (NO), the process proceeds to step S158.

  When the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than 0 in the process of step S152 (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the PBB / BB end process (S153). In this PBB / BB end processing, if it is the end of the PBB gaming state, the PBB gaming state flag is cleared to "0", and if it is the end of the normal BB gaming state, according to the ending state, Clear "0" in the RT0 gaming state flag during BB, the RT2 gaming state flag during BB, or the RB gaming state flag during BB. If it is the end of the RT2 gaming state during BB, the bit 5 of the carryover combination storage area is cleared to "0" (the internal winning state of "RB during RB" is ended). Also, the external signal 1 or the external signal 2 is turned off.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether it is the end of the RT2 gaming state during BB (S154). If the main CPU 93 determines that it is the end of the RT2 gaming state during BB (YES), it sets the RT2 gaming state as the gaming state (S155). That is, the replay high probability state shifted in the BB gaming state is taken over to the normal gaming state after the end of the BB gaming state. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not the end time of the RT2 gaming state during BB (NO), the main CPU 93 sets the RT0 gaming state as the gaming state (S156).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes bonus end command transmission processing (S157), and ends the bonus end check processing. In this bonus end command transmission process, bonus end command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 is generated, and the generated bonus end command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95. The bonus end command data is data for enabling the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as the end of the BB gaming state, for example.

  If the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than 0 in the process of step S152 (NO), then the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the BB gaming state during BB. (S158). If it is determined that the current gaming state is BB during RB gaming (YES), and if the small winning combination is won in the unit game (ie, there is a medal payout), the BB during RB gaming If the number-of-winnings counter for counting the number of winnings for small winnings in the state and the number of playing times for counting the number of gamings in the RB gaming state in BB are decremented by one each, If the medals have not been paid out, the game number counter is decremented by 1 (S159).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the winning number counter or the gaming number counter is “0” (S160). If it is determined that neither the winning number counter nor the gaming number counter is “0” (NO), the bonus end check processing is ended. If it is determined that the number-of-winnings counter or the number-of-games counter is “0” (YES), processing during BB end of RB is executed (S161), and the bonus end check processing is ended. In this BB during RB end processing, the BB during RB gaming state flag is cleared to “0”, and the BB during RT0 gaming state flag is set to “1”.

  If the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is not the BB in-BB gaming state in the process of step S158 (NO), then it determines whether the current gaming state is the PBB gaming state (S162). When the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is not the PBB gaming state (NO), the bonus end check process is ended. If it is determined that the current gaming state is the PBB gaming state (YES), the PBB gaming state processing is executed (S163), and the bonus end check processing is ended. In this PBB gaming state processing, the PBB gaming state is always in a specific RB gaming state (that is, a state where the drawing is made by each lottery value of the PBB gaming state defined in the BB gaming state internal lottery table shown in FIG. 17) To be controlled.

  In the present embodiment, the processing in steps S154 to 156 is performed (that is, the gaming state at the end of the BB gaming state is determined), and the winning probability of the replay combination in the BB gaming state is taken over in the general gaming state. Although it is configured to be possible, it is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 93 may be configured to take over the lottery value of the replay combination set at the end of the BB gaming state as it is in the normal gaming state. In this case, if the lottery value of the replay combination in the RT0 gaming state during BB is set at the end of the BB gaming state during BB (or when the “BB during RB” is won), the above-mentioned steps S154 to 156 are performed. Processing can be omitted.

<Bonus operation check process>
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the bonus operation check process executed in step S29 of the main control process shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether the current gaming state is the PBB gaming state (S170). If the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is the PBB gaming state (YES), it ends the bonus operation check process.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is not the PBB gaming state (NO), subsequently, the current gaming state is the normal BB gaming state (that is, BB during RT0 gaming state, BB during RT2) It is determined whether the gaming state or the gaming state in any of BB in the RB gaming state (S171). If the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is not the normal BB gaming state (NO), the process proceeds to step S176.

  If the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is the normal BB gaming state in the processing of step S 171 (YES), subsequently, whether the current gaming state is the BB gaming state during BB or not (S172). If the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is BB during the RB gaming state (YES), the bonus operation check process is ended.

  If the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is not the BB in-RB gaming state in the process of step S172 (NO), subsequently, the combination of symbols in "BB in RB" is displayed on the effective line It is determined whether or not it is (S173). When the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of symbols “BB in RB” is not displayed on the activated line (NO), it ends the bonus operation check process.

  When the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of symbols “RB in BB” is displayed on the activated line in the process of step S 173 (YES), the main CPU 93 executes a process in RB during RB operation (S 174). In this BB during RB operation process, “1” is set to the BB during RB gaming state flag, and the “RT2 gaming state flag during BB” is cleared to “0”. Further, "8" is set in the winning number counter, and "12" is set in the gaming number counter. Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carryover combination storage area (S175), and ends the bonus operation check process. That is, the main CPU 93 clears bit 5 of the carryover combination storage area to “0”.

  If the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is not the normal BB gaming state in the process of step S 171 (NO), then the symbol of either “PBB” or “BB 1 to 4” is displayed. It is determined whether the combination is displayed on the valid line (S176). When the main CPU 93 determines that the combination of symbols of “PBB” or “BB1 to 4” is not displayed on the activated line (NO), the process proceeds to step S180.

  When the main CPU 93 determines that a combination of symbols of “PBB” or “BB1 to 4” is displayed on the activated line in the process of step S176 (YES), the PBB / BB activation process Is executed (S177). In this PBB / BB activation process, if the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line is a combination of symbols of "PBB", the PBB gaming state flag is set to "1", and other gaming state flags (for example, , RT4 gaming state flag) is cleared to "0", and the bonus end number counter is set to "297". In addition, if the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line is a combination of symbols “BB1 to 4”, “1” is set to the RT0 gaming status flag in BB, and another gaming status flag (for example, , RT4 gaming state flag) is cleared to "0", and "44" is set to the bonus end number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carryover combination storage area corresponding to the bonus combination that has won the prize (S178), executes the bonus start command transmission process (S179), and ends the bonus operation check process. In this bonus start command transmission process, bonus start command data to be sent from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 is generated, and the generated bonus start command data is stored in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 95. The bonus start command data is data for enabling the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as the start of the BB gaming state, for example.

  When the main CPU 93 determines that any combination of symbols “PBB” or “BB1 to 4” is not displayed on the effective line in the process of step S176 (NO), it is shown in FIG. It is determined whether a combination of symbols of any of the replay roles is displayed on the activated line (S180). When the main CPU 93 determines that a combination of symbols of any of the replay roles is displayed on the activated line (YES), an automatic insertion request (i.e., a request process for activating replay in the next unit game) is Then (S181), the bonus operation check process ends. In addition, the bonus operation check process is ended also when it is determined that the combination of the symbols of any replay role is not displayed on the activated line (NO).

<Interrupt process by control of main CPU>
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 93. This process is periodically performed every 1.1172 ms.

  First, the main CPU 93 saves a register (S320). Next, the main CPU 93 executes an input port check process described later in the description of FIG. 72 (S321). In this input port check process, for example, the presence or absence of signals of various switches and sensors connected to the main CPU 93 is confirmed.

  For example, the main CPU 93 stores information on on and off of various switches such as the start switch 79 and the stop switch (not shown) and information on on and off of various sensors such as a medal sensor (not shown) in the main RAM 95.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes timer update processing (S322). In this timer updating process, for example, when the value of the lock timer or the automatic closing interval waiting time timer is 1 or more, the process of subtracting the value of the timer by “1” at each interruption is executed. Next, the main CPU 93 executes communication data transmission processing described later in the description of FIG. 73 (S323). Next, the main CPU 93 executes reel control processing (S324). In this reel control process, for example, based on the request to start rotation of each reel in the reel rotation start process (S20 in FIG. 63), acceleration control is performed to accelerate the rotation of each reel by driving and controlling each stepping motor. Drive control of each stepping motor based on each reel reaching a predetermined speed (for example, 80 revolutions / one minute) to execute constant speed processing to maintain the predetermined speed, and stop Based on the request to stop the rotation of each reel in the control process (S22 of FIG. 63), the stepping control is performed to control the stepping motor to execute the stop process to stop the rotation of each reel.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes lamp / 7SEG driving processing (S325). For example, the main CPU 93 displays the number of credited medals, the number of payouts, and the like on various display units. Next, the main CPU 93 restores the register (S326), and ends the periodically occurring interrupt processing.

<Input port check process>
FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing an input port check process executed in step S321 of the interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 93 shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 checks the state of each input port (S330). Next, the main CPU 93 stores the previous interrupt, that is, the state of the input port before one interrupt in the main RAM 95 (S331), and stores the current state of the input port in the main RAM 95 (S332).

  As described above, the main CPU 93 can check the states of both input ports by comparing the state of the input port before one interrupt with the current state of the input port. It is checked whether the state has changed, for example, whether the BET button 22 or the start lever 23 has been operated.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the on-edge state in the main RAM 95 (S333). For example, when the input data of the input port allocated to the start switch 79 is data indicating OFF before one interrupt, the main CPU 93 shifts to the on-edge when the data indicates ON at present. On-edge information indicating that is stored in the main RAM 95, and the input data of the input port assigned to the start switch 79 is data showing ON before one interrupt, but is data showing OFF at present. If there is, the main RAM 95 stores off-edge information indicating that it has shifted to the off-edge.

<Communication data transmission process>
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing communication data transmission processing executed in step S323 of the interrupt processing under control of the main CPU 93 shown in FIG.

  First, the main CPU 93 subtracts one from the communication data transmission timer (S340). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the communication data transmission timer is 0 (S341).

  Here, when it is determined that the communication data transmission timer is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the communication data transmission process. On the other hand, when determining that the communication data transmission timer is 0 (YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not there is unsent data in the communication data storage area (S342).

  Here, when it is determined that there is no unsent data in the communication data storage area (NO), the main CPU 93 generates non-operation command data, and communication data in which the generated non-operation command data is allocated to the main RAM 95. It stores in the storage area (S343).

  As the no-operation command data, information on the on-edge and off-edge of various switches and information on on and off of various sensors stored in the above-described input port check process are set as parameters. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of interrupt processing in which a command is not transmitted, and to prevent a fraudulent action on command transmission, and also to make the sub CPU 102 recognize these pieces of information. It is possible to change the effect based on an operation (for example, an operation on the BET button 22 while the reel is rotating).

  In step S342, when it is determined that there is unsent data in the communication data storage area (YES), or after performing the processing of step S343, the main CPU 51 sets an initial value (for example, 14) to the communication data transmission timer. (S344).

  Next, the main CPU 51 transmits the communication data stored in the communication data storage area to the sub control circuit 101 (S345). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether transmission of communication data has been completed (S346).

  Here, when it is determined that transmission of communication data is not completed (NO), the main CPU 93 returns to the process of step S345. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transmission of the communication data is completed (YES), the main CPU 93 updates the communication data storage area to clear (S347), and ends the communication data transmission process.

[Sub control process]
Next, various processing executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 89.

<Power on processing>
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing power on processing of the sub CPU 102 at the time of power on.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an initialization process (S350). In this initialization process, the sub CPU 102 performs error check on the sub RAM 83 or the like and initializes the task system. The task system includes a lamp control task which is a task group of timer interrupt synchronization, and a sound control task.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 starts the lamp control task shown in FIG. 75 (S351). The lamp control task waits for the sub CPU 102 to receive a timer interrupt event message transmitted to the sub CPU 102 every two milliseconds, and in response to receiving this timer interrupt event message, It is a process of executing a process of controlling the lighting state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 starts the sound control task shown in FIG. 76 (S352). In the sound control task, the sub CPU 102 controls the sound output state of the speakers such as the speakers 42, 58, 64, 65L, and 65R. Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the mother task (S353), and ends the power on processing. In the mother task, a main board communication task shown in FIG. 77 and a display control task (not shown) for controlling display contents displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 are activated.

<Ramp control task>
FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing a lamp control task activated in step S351 of the power on processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes timer interrupt initialization processing (S360). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes lamp related data initialization processing (S361).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes timer interrupt waiting (S362). In this process, a task group different from timer interrupt synchronization is executed until the sub CPU 102 receives a timer interrupt event message every two milliseconds.

  As a task group different from timer interrupt synchronization, for example, there is a main board communication task which is a task group of command reception interrupt synchronization. Also, a task group (not shown) of power supply interruption synchronization, a task group (not shown) of door monitoring unit communication synchronization, etc. may be mentioned.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a sound control task shown in FIG. 76 (S363). In this process, the task in the next priority of the task group of timer interrupt synchronization which is the same group as the lamp control task is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the priority of the task group of timer interrupt synchronization is basically in the order of the lamp control task and the sound control task. Therefore, in step S363, the sound control task at the next priority of the lamp control task is executed. In step S363, of the sound control tasks shown in FIG. 76, the processes of steps S372 and S373 are executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an analysis process of lamp data to determine the light emission mode of the LED 85 included in the determined effect data (S364), and executes a lamp effect execution process based on the lamp data (S365). It returns to the process of S362.

<Sound control task>
FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing a lamp control task activated in step S352 of the power on processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes initialization processing of sound related data related to the sound output state of the speakers such as the speakers 42, 58, 64, 65L, 65R (S370). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a task in the next priority of the task group of timer interrupt synchronization which is the same group as the sound control task, that is, the lamp control task (S371).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes analysis processing of sound data to determine the sound output mode of the speakers 42, 58, 64, 65L, 65R, etc. included in the determined effect data (S372), Based on the sound effect execution process (S 373), the process of step S 371 is executed.

<Main board communication task>
FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing a main board communication task started in the mother task started in step S353 shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes initialization of the communication message queue (S380), and executes a check of the received command (S381).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether a command different from the previous one has been received (S382). Here, if it is determined that a command different from the previous one has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 returns to the process of step S381.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a command different from the previous one has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the received command is a legitimate command, and creates game information from the received command and creates it The game information is stored in the sub RAM 103 (S383). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a command analysis process shown in FIG. 78 (S384), and returns to the process of step S381.

<Command analysis process>
FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing command analysis processing executed in step S384 of the main board communication task shown in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102 executes the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 79 based on the received command type and information included in the command data (S390), executes the lamp data determination process (S391), and executes the sound data determination process. Is executed (S392), each data determined is registered (S393), and the command analysis process is ended.

<Determination content determination processing>
FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an effect content determination process performed in step S390 of the command analysis process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether an initialization command has been received (S400). Here, if it is determined that the initialization command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes the initialization command reception process (S401), and ends the effect content determination process. In the initialization command reception process, effect data is set based on the information transmitted as the initialization command. For example, the rendering state is restored or the rendering state is initialized based on the presence or absence of the setting change. Further, for example, if it is time to change the setting, the mode in the normal game is determined by lottery.

  On the other hand, when determining that the initialization command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the medal insertion command has been received (S402). Here, if it is determined that the medal insertion command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a medal insertion command reception process (S403), and ends the effect content determination process. In the medal insertion command reception process, effect data is set based on the information transmitted as the medal insertion command. For example, based on the presence or absence of the insertion of the medal, effect data for outputting the medal insertion sound is set. In addition, effect data for displaying a background image according to the mode and the game state is set.

  In addition, in the medal insertion command reception process, the medal insertion command (see S52 in FIG. 65) transmitted based on the automatic insertion process (see S51 in FIG. 65) being performed (that is, activating replay). Is received, effect data for outputting an automatic input sound notifying that the replay is activated is set. Here, in the present embodiment, a predetermined standby time (replay operation recognition time) is set at the time of operation of replay, but the automatic insertion sound is in the predetermined standby time (replay operation recognition time). It is also configured to be output.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible for the player to activate the replay without delay even if the standby time (for example, the replay activation recognition time) for recognizing the replay operation is set. It can be made to recognize.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the medal insertion command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the start command has been received (S404). Here, if it is determined that the start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a start command reception process described later in the description of FIG. 80 (S405), and ends the effect content determination process. In the start command reception process, effect data based on the information transmitted as the start command is set. For example, during the ART game, if the internal winning combination is a push order, effect data for notifying a procedure of the stop operation which is most advantageous for the player is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the reel rotation start command has been received (S406). Here, if it is determined that the reel rotation start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a reel rotation start command reception process (S407), and ends the effect content determination process. In the reel rotation start command reception process, effect data is set based on the information transmitted as the reel rotation start command. For example, effect data for outputting a reel rotation start sound is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel rotation start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the reel stop command has been received (S408). Here, if it is determined that the reel stop command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a reel stop command reception process (S409), and ends the effect content determination process. In the reel stop command reception process, effect data is set based on the information transmitted as the reel stop command. For example, effect data for outputting a reel stop sound is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel stop command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lock command has been received (S410). Here, if it is determined that the lock command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes lock command reception processing (S411), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the lock command reception process, effect data is set based on the information transmitted as the lock command. For example, effect data for displaying a video according to the type of lock is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the lock command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning operation command has been received (S412). Here, if it is determined that the winning operation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a winning operation command reception process described later in the description of FIG. 88 (S413), and ends the effect content determination process. . In the winning operation command reception process, effect data is set based on the information transmitted as the winning operation command. For example, effect data for outputting a payout sound corresponding to the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination is set. Also, for example, when the gaming state shifts, effect data for displaying a video indicating that is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the bonus start command has been received (S414). Here, if it is determined that the bonus start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes bonus start command reception processing (S415), and ends the effect content determination processing. In the bonus start command reception process, effect data is set based on the information transmitted as the bonus start command. For example, effect data for displaying the initial value of the bonus end number counter according to the type of bonus to be started is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the bonus end command has been received (S416). Here, if it is determined that the bonus end command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a bonus end command reception process described later in the description of FIG. 89 (S417), and ends the effect content determination process. . In the bonus end command reception process, effect data is set based on the information transmitted as the bonus end command. For example, effect data for suggesting a gaming state to shift after the end of the bonus is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the bonus end command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the no-operation command has been received (S418). Here, if it is determined that the no-operation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a no-operation command reception process (S419), and ends the effect content determination process.

  In the no-operation command reception process, the effect data may be varied based on the information transmitted as the no-operation command. For example, if the effect data determined in the start command reception process is effect data requiring continuous hitting of the BET button 22, the BET button 22 received as a no-operation command is in the on-edge state or in the off-edge state The effect data is varied based on the information. On the other hand, if it is determined in S418 that the no-operation command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing.

<Process when receiving start command>
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a start command reception process executed in step S405 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the PBB gaming state is in progress (S430). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the PBB gaming state is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the number of ART games added in PBB shown in FIG. 28 and determines the number of ART games added in based on the internal winning combination (S431) Then, the determined number of added ART games is added to the number of ART games (S432), and the process proceeds to step S442.

  If it is determined that the PBB gaming state is not in progress in the process of step S430 (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the ART game is in progress (S433). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART game is in progress (YES), it executes an ART in-game process described later in the explanation of FIG. 81 (S434), and proceeds to the process of step S442.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART game is not in progress in the process of step S433 (NO), then the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the battle CZ is in progress (S435). If it is determined that the battle CZ is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a battle CZ in-progress process described later in the explanation of FIG. 84 (S436), and proceeds to the process of step S442.

  If it is determined that the battle CZ is not in progress in the process of step S435 (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the normal BB is in progress (S437). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the normal BB is being performed (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes a normal BB middle process described later in the description of FIG. 85 (S438), and proceeds to the process of step S442.

  If it is determined in the process of step S437 that the normal CPU is not in progress (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the item CZ is in progress (S439). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the item CZ is in progress (YES), the sub CPU 102 executes an item CZ in-progress process to be described later with reference to FIG. 86 (S440), and proceeds to the process of step S442.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the item CZ is not in progress in the process of step S439 (NO), it executes a normal game in-progress process described later in the explanation of FIG. 87 (S441), and proceeds to the process of step S442.

  Next, when the effect data is not set yet, the sub CPU 102 sets start effect data according to the internal winning combination etc (S 442), and ends the start command reception process. In the process of step S 442, for example, if during the additional BB or during the battle CZ, the start effect data according to the HP subtraction success / failure and the HP subtraction value is set, and if it is during the normal BB, the card acquisition success / failure and the card The start effect data according to the type is set, and if the item CZ is in progress, the start effect data according to the type of card used and the result of the ART lottery is set, and if in normal game, the current mode Start effect data corresponding to the internal winning combination is set.

<ART game processing>
FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing ART in-play processing executed in step S434 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 sets navigation data during ART game according to the internal winning combination (S450). In the process of step S450, for example, in the RT0 gaming state, if the "push order small part" is determined as the internal winning combination, "RT transition symbols 1 to 8" are displayed and the game is shifted to the RT1 gaming state. The ART in-game navigation data for which the operation order is not notified is set. Also, in the RT1 gaming state, when "RT2 transition lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, in order to shift to the RT2 gaming state, "RT2 transition lip 1, 2" is displayed stop operation order will be displayed The ART in-game navigation data is set.

  In addition, in the RT2 gaming state, when "RT2 maintenance lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, in order to maintain the RT2 gaming state, the stop operation order in which "normal ripples 1 to 8" will be displayed is informed. When the ART game in progress navigation data is set, and "RT3 transition lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, "RT3 transition lip 1, 2" will be displayed in order to shift to the RT3 gaming state. The ART in-game navigation data in which the stop operation order is notified is set. In addition, in the RT3 gaming state, when “RT3 maintenance lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, in order to maintain the RT3 gaming state, the stop operation order in which “normal ripples 1 to 8” is displayed is informed. During ART game navigation data is set. In addition, when “push order small part” is decided as an internal winning combination in RT1 to 3 gaming states, medals are increased, and in RT2 and RT3 gaming states, to maintain the RT gaming state, “upper bell The ART in-game navigation data is set in which the stop operation order in which “1 to 4”, “cross-up bell”, or “middle bell” is to be displayed is notified. In addition, in a unit game in which the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the symbol combination of the determined bonus combination can be displayed, ART game in-game navigation data in which the combination of the determined bonus combination is notified May be set.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the current RT gaming state is the replay low probability state (for example, RT0 gaming state or RT1 gaming state), and the RT gaming state (RT3 gaming state) in which the ART gaming is performed with the replay high probability state. Even if it is RT gaming state (RT2 gaming state) different from), it is decided to manage as being in "ART gaming", but it is decided to shift to ART gaming, RT3 gaming When not transitioning to the state, it may be managed as being in the "ART preparation state", which is a different management state. That is, an RT gaming state (RT3 gaming state) in which ART gaming is performed may be managed by different management states from other RT gaming states (for example, RT0 to RT2 gaming states).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the additional BB is being performed (S451). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional BB is being performed (YES), the sub BB executes an additional BB in-progress process which will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 (S452), and ends the ART in-game process.

  If it is determined in the process of step S451 that the additional BB is not being performed (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the special additional state is being performed (S453). If the sub CPU 102 determines that it is in the special addition state (YES), it executes the special addition state processing (S454), and ends the ART in game processing. In the special addition state processing, as described above, the continuous drawing of the set in the special addition state and the drawing of the number of addition ART games are performed.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not in the special addition state in the process of step S453 (NO), it then determines whether the preferential mode lock flag is on (S455). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the above-described preferential state is obtained during the ART game. If the sub CPU 102 determines that the preferential mode lock flag is on (YES), the process proceeds to step S460.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the preferential mode lock flag is not on (that is, off) in the process of step S 455 (NO), then it is internally elected for the same color bonus (ie, BB1 or BB3). It is determined whether or not it has been made (S456). If it is determined that the same color bonus is internally won (YES), the process proceeds to step S458.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the same color bonus has not been internally won in the process of step S456 (NO), subsequently, whether the different color bonus (that is, BB2 or BB4) has been internally won during the preferential mode It is determined whether or not (S457). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the different color bonus is internally won during the preferential mode (YES), the preferential mode lock flag is turned on (S458), and the process proceeds to step S460.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the different color bonus is not internally won in the preferential mode in the processing of step S 457 (NO), it refers to the ART in progress mode lottery table shown in FIG. Based on the mode transition lottery is executed (S459), and the ART game mode is set based on the lottery result.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART game number update (subtraction) process (S460). In this ART game number updating (subtraction) process, when in the extra BB, in the ART game other than in the special overhead state, and in the RT3 gaming state, the ART game number set for each unit game is “1 "Subtract and update one by one. Therefore, for example, when transitioning to ART gaming after the end of the PBB gaming state, the number of ART games is not subtracted in the RT0 to 2 gaming states, and subtraction of the number of ART games is started after transitioning to the RT3 gaming state. The Rukoto. In addition, during the ART game, when the player performs the stop operation according to the procedure of the stop operation different from the procedure of the stop operation notified, and shifts from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state, it shifts to the RT3 gaming state again The number of ART games is subtracted even before the end of the game. Further, in the RT4 gaming state, which is the internal winning state of the bonus combination, the ART game number may not be decremented and updated, or the ART game number may be decremented and updated until the internal lottery result is notified.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART game end check process described later in the description of FIG. 83 (S461), and ends the ART game in-progress process.

<Additional BB processing>
FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing a process during additional BB executed in step S452 of the ART in-game processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 sets the push order small combination (the value of the data combination for small combination and replay is “26” to “37”) or the RB small and medium combination (the value of the data pointer for small combination and replay is “45”) It is determined whether the internal winning has been made (S470). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination has been made to the push order small combination or the RB middle and small combination (YES), the above-described lottery possible number is added by "1" (S471). In addition, the number of lottery times may be increased by “1” also when “unknown bell” (the value of the data pointer for small part and replay is “38”) is internally won.

  In the process of step S470, if the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination has not been won by the pushing order small combination or the RB small and medium small combination (NO), or if the process of step S471 is performed, then the lottery is possible. It is determined whether the number of times is "5" or more (S472). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of times the lottery is allowed is “5” or more (YES), the sub BB is ended during the additional BB. That is, if the number of winnings of the pushing order small part or the RB small and medium part is 5 times, the drawing for shifting to the special additional state during the “additional BB” (that is, the subtraction drawing of the “HP”) The lottery period in which the

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S 472 that the number of times the lottery is possible is not “5” or more (NO), it refers to the HP subtraction / rejection success / failure lottery table in ART shown in FIG. The HP subtraction success / failure lottery is executed based on (S 473). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has been won (S474). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the HP subtraction success / failure lottery is won (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART in-art HP subtraction value lottery table shown in FIG. 51, determines the HP subtraction value based on the internal winning combination, The determined HP subtraction value is subtracted from the value of HP of (S475).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has not won (ie, not won) in the process of step S 474 (NO), or if the process of step S 475 is performed, the sub CPU 102 continues as described above. It is determined whether the number of consecutive times of replay is "5" or more (S476). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the replay continuous number is “5” or more (YES), it refers to the HP subtraction success / failure lottery table during rep continuous time ART shown in FIG. 52, based on the enemy type and the replay continuous number. Then, the HP subtraction success / failure lottery is executed (S477). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the HP subtraction success / failure lottery is won (S478). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the HP subtraction success / failure lottery is won (YES), the HP subtraction value ART lottery table for ART for lip continuous time A to C shown in FIG. 53, or the lip continuous time enemy shown for FIG. 54 The HP subtraction value lottery table during ART for D is referred to, the HP subtraction value is determined based on the number of continuous replays, and the determined HP subtraction value is subtracted from the current HP value (S479).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has not won (ie, not won) in the processing of step S 478 (NO), or if the processing of step S 479 is performed, the current It is determined whether the value of HP is "0" or less (S480). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the current HP value is less than or equal to “0” (YES), it turns on the special loading status flag, which is information for shifting to the special loading status after the termination of the loading BB ( S481), the processing during the addition BB ends. Also, if it is determined that the current HP value is not less than or equal to "0" (that is, it is greater than or equal to "1") (NO), the processing in the additional BB is ended.

<ART game end check processing>
FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing the during-addition BB in-process executed in step S461 of the ART in-game process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the number of ART games is “0” (S 490). If it is determined that the number of ART games is not “0” (ie, is “1” or more) (NO), the ART game end check process is ended. On the other hand, when determining that the number of ART games is “0” (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether there is stock of the number of ART games (S 491). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is the number of ART games added by the addition of the number of bells described above. If the sub CPU 102 determines that there is a stock of the number of ART games (YES), the number of ART games stocked is added to the number of ART games (S492), and the ART game end check process is ended. Although illustration is omitted, the effect data indicating that there is the number of ART games stocked along with the process of step S 492, and the number of games the number of ART games stocked was Is set.

  If it is determined that there is no stock of the number of ART games in the process of step S 491 (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the number of sets of ARTs is “1” or more (S 493). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of ART sets is "1" or more (YES), the initial number (50) is set as the number of ART games (S494), and the number of ART sets is decremented by 1 ( S495), the ART game end check processing ends.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of ART sets is not "1" or more (that is, "0") in the process of step S493 (NO), the ART end mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. The mode transition lottery is executed by referring to (S 496), and the mode during the normal game is set based on the lottery result. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the normal game from the next game (S497), sets the ceiling game number to an initial value (0) (S498), and ends the ART game end check process. Although illustration is omitted, in the process of step S 493, the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of ART sets is not “1” or more (that is, “0”) (NO), which is an advantage. If the mode lock flag is on, the preferential mode lock flag is turned off.

<Process in Battle CZ>
FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing a battle CZ in-progress process executed in step S436 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the ART winning flag is on (S500). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the ART game during the battle CZ. If the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART winning flag is not on (that is, off) (NO), then the pushing order small part (the value of the small part / replay data pointer is “26” to It is determined whether or not the internal winning of "37"), or RB small and medium winning combination (the value of the small combination and replay data pointer is "45") has been made (S501). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination has been made to the pushing order small combination or the RB medium and small combination (YES), the above-described lottery possible number is added by "1" (S502). In addition, the number of lottery times may be increased by “1” also when “unknown bell” (the value of the data pointer for small part and replay is “38”) is internally won.

  In the process of step S501, if the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination has not been made to the pushing order small combination or the RB small and medium small combination (NO), or if the process of step S502 is performed, then the lottery is possible. It is determined whether the number of times is "5" or more (S503). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of times the lottery is possible is “5” or more (YES), the process in the battle CZ is ended. That is, if the number of winnings of the push order small part or the RB small and medium part is 5 times, a lottery for shifting to ART game during the "Battle CZ" (that is, a subtraction lottery of "HP") The lottery period to be held will end.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S 503 that the number of lottery times is not “5” or more (NO), it refers to the HP subtraction success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. Then, the HP subtraction success / failure lottery is executed (S504). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the HP subtraction success / failure lottery is won (S505). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the HP subtraction success / failure lottery is won (YES), the HP subtraction value lottery table for character A shown in FIG. 31, the HP subtraction value lottery table for character B shown in FIG. 32, or The HP subtraction value is determined based on the internal winning combination with reference to the HP subtraction value lottery table for character C shown in FIG. 5, and the determined HP subtraction value is subtracted from the current HP value (S506).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has not won (ie, not won) in the process of step S 505 (NO), or if the process of step S 506 is performed, the sub CPU 102 continues the process described above. It is determined whether the number of consecutive times of replay is "5" or more (S507). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the replay continuous number is "5" or more (YES), it refers to the rep continuous HP subtraction success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. A lottery is executed (S508). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the HP subtraction success / failure lottery is won (S509). When it is determined that the sub CPU 102 has won the HP subtraction success / failure lottery (YES), the HP subtraction value lottery table for the rep continuous character A shown in FIG. 35, the HP subtraction value for the rep continuous character B shown in FIG. 37. Referring to the lottery table or the HP subtraction value lottery table for rep continuous character C shown in FIG. 37, the HP subtraction value is determined based on the number of times of continuous replay, and the HP subtraction value determined from the current HP value is subtracted. To do (S510).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the HP subtraction success / failure lottery has not won (ie, not won) in the process of step S 509 (NO), or if the process of step S 510 is performed, the sub CPU 102 continues. It is determined whether the value of HP is "0" or less (S511). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the current HP value is not less than or equal to “0” (ie, is greater than or equal to “1”) (NO), it ends the battle CZ in-process processing. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current HP value is less than or equal to "0" (YES), the ART winning flag is turned on (S512), and the initial value (50) is set as the number of ART games. (S513).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART game number addition success / failure lottery table when the ART C is selected during the battle CZ shown in FIG. 38, and executes the ART game number addition lottery based on the lottery number and the internal winning combination (S514) ). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not an ART game number additional lottery has been won (S515). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART game number addition lottery has been won (YES), it refers to the ART selection game number ART table for ART winning during battle CZ shown in FIG. The additional ART game number (multiple) is determined, the ART game number is added according to the determination result (S519), and the battle CZ in-process is ended. Also, the sub CPU 102 ends the battle CZ in-progress process also when it is determined that the ART game number addition lottery has not been won (that is, non-winning) (NO).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART won flag is on in the process of step S500 (YES), it refers to the ART game number addition success / failure lottery table in the battle CZ shown in FIG. Based on the number of ART games, an additional lottery is executed (S516).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not an ART game number additional lottery has been won (S517). If it is determined that the ART game number addition lottery has been won (YES), the number of ART games to be added is determined based on the internal winning combination with reference to the ART game number lottery table in battle CZ shown in FIG. Then, the number of ART games is added according to the determination result (S518), and the battle CZ in-process processing is ended. Also, the sub CPU 102 ends the battle CZ in-progress process also when it is determined that the ART game number addition lottery has not been won (that is, non-winning) (NO).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, during a predetermined special gaming state (for example, battle CZ), a lottery (for example, HP) is performed to determine whether or not to update a specific numerical value (for example, HP) based on the internal winning combination. It is decided to shift to a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) when a drawing of a subtraction value is performed and this specific numerical value becomes a specific update result (for example, "0" or less). Are configured to

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is further determined whether or not a specific numerical value (for example, HP) is to be updated based on the number of consecutive winnings for the specific combination (for example, replay role) (for example, a drawing of the HP subtraction value) Is configured to be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the type of character for which it is determined whether or not to win a lottery (for example, lottery for HP subtraction value) whether to update a specific numerical value (for example, HP) It is configured to fluctuate by

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific part (for example, the replay) is set as a transition opportunity when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the internal winning of “JAC”) during a predetermined special game state (for example, battle CZ). The winning probability of the combination is increased (for example, transition to the RT2 gaming state during BB) is configured.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of winnings of a predetermined small combination including a push order small combination (for example, when the specific numerical value (for example, HP) becomes a specific update result (for example, "0" or less) Based on the number of times the lottery is allowed, the number of games (for example, the number of ART games) of a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, the ART game) can be added.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to perform a more diverse lottery regarding lottery for judging whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player (for example, the transition lottery to ART game) .

  Further, in the present embodiment, a lottery period (for example, the number of lottery times) in which it is lottery whether or not to update the specific numerical value (for example, HP) mentioned above during a predetermined special gaming state (for example, battle CZ) A period of time until 5 is reached is defined, and in this lottery period, the number of winnings of a predetermined small combination including a push order small combination in a predetermined special gaming state (for example, battle CZ) For example, it is configured to end when it becomes 5 times).

  By configuring in this way, even if the player intentionally drops the winning order small part, since the lottery period does not increase, it is possible to prevent the game arcade from being unexpectedly disadvantaged. be able to. In other words, while properly balancing the profits of the player and the game arcade, it is more versatile in regard to the lottery (for example, the transition lottery to the ART game) whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player. We can perform rich lottery.

<Process in normal BB>
FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing normal BB internal processing executed in step S438 of the start command reception processing shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the ART winning flag is on (S530). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not to shift to ART game has already been determined during normal BB. If the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART winning flag is not on (that is, off) (NO), then the pushing order small part (the value of the small part / replay data pointer is “26” to It is determined whether or not the internal winning of "37"), or RB small and medium winning combination (the value of the small combination and replay data pointer is "45") has been made (S531). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination has been won by the pushing order small combination or the RB medium and small combination (YES), the above-described lottery possible number is added by “1” (S532). In addition, the number of lottery times may be increased by “1” also when “unknown bell” (the value of the data pointer for small part and replay is “38”) is internally won.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S 531 that the internal winning combination has not been won by the pushing order small combination or the RB small and medium small combination (NO), or if the process of step S 532 is performed, then the lottery is possible. It is determined whether the number of times is "5" or more (S533). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of times the lottery is allowed is “5” or more (YES), the processing during the normal BB ends. That is, when the number of times of winning of the pushing order small part or the RB small and medium part becomes 5 times, the drawing of the drawing right which can receive the drawing for shifting to ART game during “normal BB” The lottery period in which the card "lottery draw" is performed will end.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S 533 that the number of times the lottery is possible is not “5” or more (NO), the card acquisition success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. An acquisition success or failure lottery is executed (S534). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the card acquisition success lottery is won (S535). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the card acquisition success lottery has been won (YES), it refers to the card type lottery table shown in FIG. 43, determines the card type based on the internal winning combination, and determines the determined card type Are stored, and the number of cards is updated (S536).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the card acquisition success / failure lottery has not won (ie, not won) in the process of step S535 (NO), or if the process of step S536 is performed, the sub CPU 102 continues the process described above. It is determined whether the number of consecutive times of replay is "5" or more (S507). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the replay continuous number is "5" or more (YES), it refers to the replay continuous card acquisition success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. A lottery is executed (S538). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the card acquisition success lottery is won (S539). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the card acquisition success lottery has been won (YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the card type lottery table shown in FIG. 45, determines the card type based on the number of consecutive replays, and determines the determined card type Are stored, and the number of cards is updated (S540).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the card acquisition success / failure lottery has not won (i.e., not won) in the process of step S539 (NO), or if the process of step S540 is performed, then the current It is determined whether the number of cards is "8" or more (S541). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the current number of cards is not "8" or more (that is, "7" or less) (NO), the normal BB internal processing ends. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 102 determines that the current number of cards is "8" or more (YES), it turns on the ART winning flag (S 542), and sets an initial value (50) to the number of ART games. (S543).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the card extra time ART game number lottery table shown in FIG. 48, executes lottery of the ART game number extra for each card type of extra, and adds the ART game number according to the lottery result. (S544), and the normal BB internal processing ends.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART won flag is on in the process of step S 530 (YES), the sub BB 102 refers to the ART game number addition success / failure lottery table in the normal BB shown in FIG. Based on the number of ART games, an additional lottery is executed (S545).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not an ART game number additional lottery has been won (S546). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART game number addition lottery has been won (YES), it refers to the normal BB addition ART game number lottery table and determines the number of ART games to be added based on the internal winning combination. Then, the number of ART games is added according to the determination result (S518), and the processing during normal BB is ended. Further, the sub CPU 102 ends the normal BB intermediate processing also when it is determined that the ART game number addition lottery has not been won (that is, non-winning) (NO).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, during a predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB), a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART gaming) is performed based on the number of consecutive winnings of the specific part (for example, replay role). The lottery right is granted from among a plurality of lottery right (for example, cards) having different degree of expectation to shift to), and a predetermined lottery state (for example, item) to be shifted after a predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB) ends In CZ), a transition lottery of a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, an ART game) according to the lottery right granted is configured to be performed.

  By configuring in this way, in a predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB), a lottery whether to shift to a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART gaming) is indirectly (ie, lottery right) (For example, ART gaming), as compared with the case where the lottery for determining whether to shift to a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART gaming) is performed directly only, a predetermined special gaming state (for example, It is possible to increase the probability of winning in the lottery in normal BB) (ie, the lottery of the lottery right).

  In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned lottery right (for example, card) is further provided based on the internal winning combination during a predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB). .

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of lottery rights granted (for example, the number of cards) is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, eight), it does not shift to a predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ). It is comprised so that it may transfer to a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game).

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to perform a more diverse lottery regarding lottery for judging whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player (for example, the transition lottery to ART game) .

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific part (for example, the replay) is set as a transition trigger when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the internal winning of “JAC”) during a predetermined special game state (for example, normal BB). From the specific combination low probability state (for example, the RT0 gaming state during BB) with a low winning probability of the combination), the specific combination high probability state (for example, the RT2 gaming state during BB) having a high winning probability of the specific combination (for example, replay role) And when the predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB) ends, if it is in transition to the specific combination high probability state (for example, during RT2 gaming state during BB), at least the predetermined lottery state (for example, For example, in the item CZ), the specific winning combination probability state is configured to be taken over (RT gaming state is set).

  By configuring in this way, during a predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB), the specific part (for example, replay part) is shifted to a state (for example, the RT2 gaming state during BB) which is drawn with high probability Even if this is the case, the interest of the game can be further enhanced without the game becoming monotonous.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, the lottery period (e.g., the number of lottery possible numbers is 5) is the lottery period in which the lottery right (e.g., card) described above is lottery during a predetermined special gaming state (e.g., normal BB) A period is defined, and in this lottery period, when the number of winnings of a predetermined small combination including a push order small combination in a predetermined special gaming state (for example, normal BB) is equal to a predetermined number (for example, 5 times) It is configured to exit.

  By configuring in this way, even if the player intentionally drops the winning order small part, since the lottery period does not increase, it is possible to prevent the game arcade from being unexpectedly disadvantaged. be able to. In other words, while properly balancing the profits of the player and the game arcade, it is more versatile in regard to the lottery (for example, the transition lottery to the ART game) whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player. We can perform rich lottery.

<Item CZ in process>
FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the item CZ in-progress process executed in step S440 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 sets navigation data in the item CZ according to the internal winning combination (S560). In the process of step S560, in the RT2 gaming state, when the "RT2 maintenance rep" is determined as the internal winning combination, in order to maintain the RT2 gaming state, the "stops normal 1-8" will be displayed. "RT3 Transition Lips 1 and 2" is displayed to prevent the transition to the RT1 gaming state when "RT3 Transition Lip" is determined as the internal winning combination while the ART in-game navigation data to which the order is notified is set. The navigation data in the item CZ for which the stop operation order to be notified is notified is set. In addition, in the RT3 gaming state, when "RT3 maintenance lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, in order not to shift to the RT1 gaming state, the stop operation order will be informed that "normal ripple 1-8" will be displayed Item CZ navigation data is set. Also, in the RT0, RT2 or RT3 gaming state, if the "push order small part" is determined as the internal winning combination, the medal is increased, and in the RT2 and RT3 gaming states, it is not shifted to the RT1 gaming state. The navigation data in the item CZ for which the stop operation order in which the upper bell 1 to 4 ", the" cross-up bell ", or the" middle bell "is to be displayed is notified are set. In addition, in the unit game in which the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the symbol combination of the determined bonus combination can be displayed, the navigation data in the item CZ in which the determined combination of the bonus combination is notified May be set.

  Also, when the RT gaming state at the start of the item CZ is the RT0 gaming state, if the "push order small part" is determined as the internal winning combination, "RT transition symbols 1 to 8" are displayed and the RT1 gaming state is set. In order to shift, the navigation data in the item CZ where the stop operation order is not notified may be set. In addition, in the RT1 gaming state which has been shifted, when “RT2 transition lip” is decided as the internal winning combination, in order to shift to the RT2 gaming state, “RT2 transition lip 1, 2” will be displayed stop operation order The navigation data may be set in the item CZ for which is notified.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the ART lottery table in the item CZ shown in FIG. 49, and executes the ART transition lottery based on the card type and the internal winning combination (S561). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART transition lottery has been won (S561). If it is determined that the ART transition lottery is won (YES), the ART game is set from the next game (S563), and an initial value (50) is set as the number of ART games (S564).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the bell winning number lottery table for ART game number addition lottery shown in FIG. 55, and determines the bell winning number (S566). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the card extra time ART game number lottery table shown in FIG. 48, executes lottery of the ART game number extra for each card type of extra, and adds the ART game number according to the lottery result. (S567), and the item CZ in-process is ended.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART transition lottery has not been won (that is, it has not won) in the process of step S 562 (NO), the number of item CZ games is decremented by 1 (S 568). It is determined whether the number of item CZ games is “0” (S569). If it is determined that the number of item CZ games is "0" (YES), the normal game is set from the next game (S570), and an initial value (0) is set as the number of ceiling games (S571). Finish the middle process. Also, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of item CZ games is not “0” (that is, is “1” or more) (NO), the item CZ in-process processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the process of step S 561, an ART transition lottery according to the expected level (“LV (level)”) is sequentially performed by the number of acquired cards according to the order of acquisition of cards in normal BB. However, the aspect of the ART transition lottery is not limited to this. For example, when there is a plurality of acquired cards at the time of item CZ transition, if the degree of expectation of these cards is different, the ART transition lottery is performed with priority given to cards with higher degree of expectation. A lottery right lottery order change process may be performed to rearrange the order of cards. Alternatively, a lottery right lottery order change process may be performed to rearrange the order of the cards so that the ART transition lottery is performed with priority given to cards with lower expectations. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to further improve the player's sense of expectation in a predetermined period (that is, the first half period or the second half period of the item CZ) in the item CZ.

  Further, for example, when there are a plurality of cards acquired at the time of transition of the item CZ, a lottery right lottery order change process may be performed to perform a lottery for rearranging the order of the cards. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the period of high expectation in the item CZ.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of lottery rights (e.g., a plurality of lottery rights having different degrees of expectation to shift to a specific advantageous gaming state (e.g., ART gaming) during a lottery right granting gaming state (e.g., normal BB)). A plurality of lottery rights can be provided from among cards), and in a predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ), specific advantageous gaming states are sequentially specified according to the degree of expectation corresponding to the given lottery right A transition lottery of (for example, ART game) is configured to be performed.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to perform a more diverse lottery regarding lottery for judging whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player (for example, the transition lottery to ART game) .

  Further, in the present embodiment, in a predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ), when winning in a transition lottery of a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game), when a surplus occurs in the granted lottery right In addition, based on the extra lottery right, the number of games (for example, the number of ART games) of a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) can be added.

  Also, in the present embodiment, when the number of lottery rights granted (for example, the number of cards) reaches a predetermined number (for example, eight) in the lottery rights-granting gaming state (for example, normal BB), a specific advantageous game In addition to being configured to shift to a state (for example, ART game), in this case, the number of game times for a particular advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) (for example, The number of ART games can be added.

  By configuring in this manner, even if a lottery right that has not been used for a lottery occurs in a predetermined lottery state, the lottery right is not wasted and the stop operation is advantageous for the player. Since the number of games played in a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART gaming) in which the procedure of is notified increases, a lottery (for example, ART) on whether to notify the procedure of the stop operation which becomes advantageous for the player With regard to the transition drawing to the game, it is possible to further enhance the interest.

<Normal game processing>
FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing a normal game in progress process executed in step S441 of the start command reception process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether it is between PBB flags (S 580). That is, sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning state of "PBB" is made. If it is determined that it is between the PBB flags (YES), the processing in the normal game is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub CPU 102 is not between the PBB flags (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the PBB has been internally won (S581). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether "PBB" is determined as the internal winning combination in the unit game this time. If it is determined that the PBB is internally won (YES), an initial value (50) is set to the ART game number (S 582), and the ART set number (for example, ART set number “3”, “4”, “5 "" "Is determined by lottery (S583), effect data for notifying PBB notifying internal winning is set (S584), and the processing during normal game is ended.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning of the PBB has not been made in the process of step S581 (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether it is between BB flags (S585). That is, sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning state of "BB 1 to 4" is established. If it is determined that the flag is between BB flags (YES), it is then determined whether the notified flag is on (S586). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the bonus combination (BB 1 to 4) has been internally won and the type thereof has already been notified. If it is determined that the notification completion flag is on (YES), the processing in the normal game is ended.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the notified flag is not on (that is, is off) in the process of step S586 (NO), it subtracts one from the precursor game number (S587), and then, the precursor flag It is determined whether the number of games is "0" (S588). If it is determined that the precursor game number is “0” (YES), a notification flag is turned on (S589), and a BB notification notifying that the bonus combination (BB 1 to 4) has been internally won and the type thereof The effect data for is set (S590), and the processing during the normal game is ended. Further, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the precursor game number is not “0” (ie, is “1” or more) (NO), the sub CPU 102 proceeds to the process of step S601.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the flag is not in the BB flag in the process of step S585 (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the internal winning of BB has been made (S591). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not one of “BB1 to BB4” is determined as the internal winning combination in the unit game this time. If it is determined that the BB has been internally won (YES), the number of prognostic games is determined based on the internal winning combination with reference to the BB winning precursor game number lottery table shown in FIG. 61 (S592). Although illustration is omitted, in accordance with the process of step S592, effect data for executing continuous effect according to the determined number of forerunner games is set.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the current mode is in the battle mode (S593). If it is determined that the current mode is the battle mode (YES), the battle mode lock flag is turned on (S594), and the process proceeds to step S588. Also, when it is determined that the current mode is not in the battle mode (that is, in the normal mode) (NO), the process proceeds to step S588. If the internally winning bonus combination is the same color bonus (ie, BB1 or BB3), the process of step S594 may be performed without performing the process of step S593.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning of BB has not been made in the process of step S591 (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the internal winning of the winning combination has been made (S595). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "BAR complete rep" has been determined as the internal winning combination. If it is determined that the winning combination has been won internally (YES), the ART game is set from the next game (S596), and an initial value (50) is set as the ART game number (S597), and the ART set number (for example, The number of ART sets "2", "3", "4" or "5" is determined by lottery (S598).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to a bell winning number lottery table for ART game number addition lottery shown in FIG. 55, determines the bell winning number (S599), and notifies for a winning combination notifying that the winning combination has been internally won. The effect data is set (S600), and the processing during the normal game is ended.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination has not been won in the process of step S595 (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the battle mode lock flag is on (S601). If it is determined that the battle mode lock flag is on (YES), the processing in the normal game is ended. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the battle mode lock flag is not on (that is, is off) (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the notified flag is on (S602). If it is determined that the notification completion flag is on (YES), the processing in the normal game is ended.

  When it is determined that the notified flag is not on (that is, off) in the process of step S602 (NO), the sub CPU 102 adds “1” to the number of ceiling games (S603). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the number of ceiling games is "500" (S604). If it is determined that the number of ceiling games is "500" (YES), the battle mode lock flag is turned on (S605), and the processing during normal game is ended.

  If it is determined that the number of ceiling games is not "500" (NO) in the process of step S604, the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not it is between BB flags (S585). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning state of “BB1 to 4” (including the unit game in which the internal winning is made). If it is determined that the flag is not between BB flags (NO), the mode transition lottery is executed based on the internal winning combination with reference to the normal mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 59 (S607), and based on the lottery result The game mode is set, and the normal game process is ended. Also, when it is determined that it is between the BB flag (YES), the processing during the normal game is ended.

  In the present embodiment, in the process of step S 595, it is determined whether or not the internal winning combination “BAR complete rep”, which is a specific replay role, is determined as the final combination, but the type of final combination is It is not limited to For example, it may be determined that a specific small combination (for example, chance 2) is also a fixed combination, and it may be determined whether or not the specific small combination has been internally won. In addition, when internally winning a predetermined combination (for example, normal RIP 2), it is determined by lottery whether or not to notify about the procedure of the specific stop operation (for example, right middle left), and it is determined to be notified If it is determined, it may be determined that the fixed combination has been won internally. In this case, when a predetermined winning combination (for example, normal RIP 2) is internally won, and the stopping operation is performed in a specific stopping operation procedure (for example, right middle left), the symbol related to the fixed combination A combination of (for example, “BAR alignment ripple”) may be displayed on the effective line.

  Further, in the present embodiment, if it is determined that the BB has been internally won in the process of step S591 (YES), and it is determined that the current mode is in the battle mode in the process of step S593 ( In the process of step S594, the battle mode lock flag is to be turned on. However, in the process of step S589, when the notified flag is on, if the current mode is in the battle mode, the battle is performed. The mode lock flag may be turned on. In this case, without performing the process of step S606, the mode transition lottery may be performed in the process of step S607 until the precursor game number becomes “0”.

  Further, in this case, even after the precursor game number becomes “0”, if the current mode is in the normal mode, the mode transition lottery may be performed in the process of step S607. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to rescue a player who is not used to watching. Of course, the mode transition lottery after the precursor game number has become “0” in order to prevent the action of shifting to the battle mode by intentionally avoiding BB's winnings with a look. It is desirable that a lottery be made based on a lottery value having a winning probability lower than the lottery value defined in the normal mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. Furthermore, it is desirable that the result of the mode transition lottery after the precursor game number has become “0” is not notified to the player.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special winning combination (for example, BB1 to BB4) is determined as the internal winning combination, the number of precursor games until the notification of the internal winning to the special winning combination is determined. If it is determined that the ceiling game number has been reached including the precursor game number and it is determined that the ceiling game number has been reached, transition is made by winning of a special part (for example, BB 1 to 4). The special game state is controlled to the first special game state (for example, battle CZ), and when it is determined that the number of ceiling games has not been reached, the special game is shifted by the winning of the special part (for example, BB1 to 4) The state is configured to be controlled to the second special game state (for example, normal BB).

  By configuring in this manner, even in the case of having the ceiling function, it is possible to allow the player to fully enjoy the protagonistic effects.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a mode transition lottery is performed based on a predetermined transition condition, and a special mode (for example, battle mode) is determined when a special combination (for example, BB1 to BB4) is determined as an internal winning combination. In this case, the special gaming state, which is shifted by the winning of the special part (for example, BB1 to BB4), is configured to be controlled to the first special gaming state (for example, battle CZ).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the special winning combination (for example, BB1 to BB4) is determined to be the internal winning combination, the number of precursor games is determined until it is notified that the special winning combination has been internally won, A mode transition lottery to a specific mode (for example, battle mode) may be performed until the precursor game number is consumed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a special combination (for example, BB1 to BB4) is determined as an internal winning combination, the number of precursor games is determined until it is notified that the special combination has been internally won. The first transition probability (for example, the probability based on the lottery value defined in the normal mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 59) to the specific mode (for example, battle mode) is performed until the precursor game number is digested. A mode transition lottery is performed, and after this precursor game number is digested, mode transition to a specific mode (for example, battle mode) with a second transition probability lower than the first transition probability It may be configured to perform a lottery.

  By configuring in this manner, the first special gaming state (for example, Battle CZ), which is a relatively advantageous special gaming state, until the special winning combination is notified to the special winning combination, or until the special winning combination is won. Can give a sense of expectation to shift to

<Process when receiving prize operation command>
FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing a winning operation command reception process executed in step S413 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether "BB 1 to 4" is displayed (S610). That is, the sub-PU 102 determines whether or not the combination of any of the symbols "BB 1 to 4" is displayed on the effective line. If it is determined that "BB 1 to 4" is displayed (YES), it is then determined whether or not the ART game is in progress (S611). If it is determined that the ART game is in progress (YES), the additional BB is set from the next game (S612), and the enemy type initial value (enemy A) and HP initial value (60) are set (S613) ).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether there is any stored enemy type or remaining HP (S614). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the enemy character (enemy type) has been updated in the previous addition BB or the HP (remaining HP) in the state subtracted in the previous addition BB is held. . If it is determined that there is a stored enemy type or remaining HP (YES), the enemy type initial value (enemy A) set in step S613 and the HP initial value (60) are changed, The stored enemy type or remaining HP is set (S615), and the processing at the time of winning operation command reception is ended. Further, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of winning operation command reception even when it is determined that there is no stored enemy type or remaining HP (NO).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART game is not in progress in the process of step S611 (NO), then the sub CPU 102 determines whether the battle mode lock flag is on (S616). If it is determined that the battle mode lock flag is not on (i.e., off) (NO), the normal BB is set from the next game (S617), and the prize activation command reception process is ended.

  If it is determined that the battle mode lock flag is on (YES) in the process of step S616, the sub CPU 102 sets the battle CZ from the next game (S618), and sets the initial value (60) of HP. (S619) Refers to the battle CZ character lottery table shown in FIG. 29, determines an ally character based on the set value, sets the determined ally character type (S620), and receives processing for receiving a prize operation command Finish.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that "BB 1 to 4" is not displayed in the process of step S610 (NO), it then determines whether a bell is displayed (S621). That is, the sub CPU 102 internally wins the push order small combination, and the stop operation is performed according to the notified stop operation procedure, and any of “upper bell 1 to 4”, “cross-up bell”, or “middle bell” It is determined whether or not the symbol combination is displayed on the effective line. In the process of step S621, it is further determined that the bell is internally elected without question, and it is determined whether any combination of symbols of "cross down bell 1 to 4" is displayed on the effective line. Good. When it is determined that the bell is not displayed (NO), the processing at the time of receiving the prize operation command is ended.

  If it is determined that the bell is displayed (YES) in the process of step S621, the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the ART game is in progress (S622). If it is determined that the ART game is not in progress (NO), the processing at the time of winning operation command reception is ended.

  If it is determined that the ART game is being played (YES) in the process of step S 622, the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether the number of times the bell winning number has been determined has been reached (S 623). If it is determined that the number of times the bell winning number has not been reached has been reached (NO), the winning operation command reception process is terminated.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of times the bell winning number has been determined has been reached in the process of step S623 (YES), it refers to the ART game number addition success / failure lottery table shown in FIG. Then, the number of ART games is increased and the lottery is executed (S624). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not an ART game number additional lottery has been won (S625). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART game number addition lottery has been won (YES), it refers to the ART number-of-games lottery table when reaching the number of bell wins shown in FIG. The number of ART games is stocked and stored according to the determination result (S626).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART game number addition lottery has not won (i.e., not won) in the process of step S625 (NO), or if the process of step S626 is performed, the sub CPU 102 continues. The bell winning number drawing table for ART game number addition lottery shown in FIG. 55 is referred to, the bell winning number is determined again (S627), and the winning operation command reception process is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) in which the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player is notified, the predetermined procedure to be notified of the procedure of the stop operation In accordance with the number of times the small winning combination (for example, bell) has been won, the number of times of play (for example, the number of ART games) of a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) can be added.

  Also, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to shift to at least a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART gaming), the number of games played for the particular advantageous gaming state (for example, ART gaming) (for example, ART gaming) The number of winnings of a predetermined small winning combination (for example, bell) for which an additional lottery is to be performed is determined.

  Further, in the present embodiment, according to a predetermined small winning combination (for example, bell) the number of winnings of a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART gaming), an additional lottery for the number of playing (for example, the number of ART games) is performed. In the case of being hit, the number of winnings of a predetermined small combination (for example, bell) for which the additional lottery for a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART gaming) (for example, the number of ART games) is to be performed is determined It is configured to be.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to give an expectation of the addition of the number of games played in a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART gaming) even if the player does not win a specific small part called "ra". .

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the number of games played in a particular advantageous gaming state (for example, ART gaming) in a particular advantageous gaming state (for example, ART gaming) based on the internal winning combination (for example, the number of ART games) ) May be configured to be able to be added.

  However, in this case, the specific part (ie, the "rare part", for example, "bonus overlapping part" in the ART lottery table in the item CZ shown in FIG. 49, or "chance 1" and "chance 2") The probability that the number of games (for example, the number of ART games) of a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) is added is at least a predetermined small part (for example, bell) when It is desirable that, when is determined to be the internal winning combination, the number of games (for example, the number of ART games) of a particular advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) is higher than the probability of being added.

  By configuring in this way, it is more versatile with regard to the addition of the number of games (for example, the number of ART games) of the advantageous gaming state (for example, ART gaming) in which the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is informed. By making it possible to draw lots and not bias the timing of the addition, in a certain advantageous gaming state (for example, ART gaming), it is possible to always give a feeling of expectation of the addition.

<Process when bonus end command is received>
FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a bonus end command reception process executed in step S417 of the effect content determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether it is time to end the PBB gaming state (S640). If it is determined that the PBB gaming state is over (YES), the process proceeds to step S660. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the end time of the PBB gaming state (NO), it subsequently determines whether it is the end time of the additional BB (S641). If it is determined that the end of the additional BB (YES), it is then determined whether the special additional state flag is on (S642). If it is determined that the special additional loading state flag is on (YES), the special additional loading state flag is turned off (S643), and the enemy type is updated and stored (S644). Here, the enemy type is the enemy A, the enemy B, and the enemy C based on the fact that the HP becomes "0" or less during the additional BB (that is, the effect that the ally character defeats the enemy character is executed). , Enemy D sequentially updated.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the preferential mode lock flag is on (S645). If it is determined that the preferential mode lock flag is on (YES), the preferential mode lock flag is turned off (S646), and the special additional state (preferential) is set from the next game (S647), and the bonus end command is received. End the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the preferential mode lock flag is not on (that is, off) (NO), the special additional state (normal) is set from the next game (S648), and the bonus end command processing is ended. Do. That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the special additional loading state is to be set as the preferential state based on whether or not the preferential mode lock flag is on.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the special addition status flag is not on (that is, is off) in the process of step S642 (NO), it stores the current enemy type and the remaining HP (S649). For example, if the enemy B is determined during the addition BB, the enemy B is stored as the enemy type so that the target enemy B is determined again during the next addition BB. In addition, when the total of the HP subtraction values determined in the lottery period during the additional BB is "20", the remaining HP is set so that the initial value of HP in the next additional BB becomes "40 (60-20)". Memorize "40" as HP. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART game from the next game (S650), and ends the bonus end command reception process.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the end time of the additional BB in the process of step S641 (NO), then the sub CPU 102 determines whether it is the end time of the battle CZ (S651). If it is determined that the battle CZ is over (YES), the battle mode lock flag is turned off (S652), and it is then determined whether the ART winning flag is on (S653). If it is determined that the ART winning flag is on (YES), the ART game is set from the next game (S654), and the number of ART game number addition lottery bell prize lottery table shown in FIG. 55 is referred to. The number of winnings is determined (S655), the additional ART game number display control process is executed (S656), and the bonus end command reception process is ended.

  In this additional ART game number display control process, the number of additional ART games determined in the process of step S518 in the battle CZ process shown in FIG. 84 and the process in step S519 of the battle CZ process shown in FIG. 84 are determined. The number of added ART games played is to be indicated by the same effect. For example, in the process of step S518 of the battle CZ in-process shown in FIG. 84, the number of added ART games is determined to be “50”, and in the process of step S519 of the battle CZ in-process shown in FIG. When the number of games (multiple) is determined to be "double," the number of ART games is "150" including the initial value "50". In this case, for example, after showing the initial value "50" of the number of ART games, "+50" is displayed twice or "+100" is displayed to indicate the number of added ART games. Become. Also, for example, the ART game number total value “150” may be indicated. That is, in the present embodiment, in a specific gaming state (for example, during battle CZ), a lottery opportunity (when winning a transition lottery of ART game or after ART game winning) and a lottery method (the number of added ART games) Even when a plurality of additional drawing with different numbers of drawing, or drawing of the number of ART games to be added, is made, it is at the end of a specific gaming state (for example, during battle CZ). Are configured to give the same indication.

  By configuring in this manner so as not to indicate by which additional lottery the additional lottery is specified, it is possible to improve interest in the notification of the lottery result.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART won flag is not on (that is, is off) in the process of step S 653 (NO), it sets the normal game from the next game (S 657), and sets the number of ceiling games. The initial value (0) is set (S658), and the bonus end command reception process is ended.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the end time of the battle CZ in the process of step S 651 (NO), it is assumed that the normal BB end time, and subsequently, whether or not the ART won flag is on. It judges (S659). If it is determined that the ART winning flag is on (YES), the ART game is set from the next game (S660), and the number of ART game number addition lottery bell prize lottery table shown in FIG. The number of winnings is determined (S661), and the bonus end command reception process is ended.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART won flag is not on (ie, off) in the process of step S659 (NO), it sets the item CZ from the next game (S662), and sets the number of cards as an item The number of CZ games is set (S663), and the bonus end command reception process is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to update a specific numerical value (for example, HP) based on the internal winning combination in a predetermined gaming period (for example, the additional BB). Lottery) is performed, and when the specific numerical value becomes a specific update result (for example, "0" or less), a predetermined benefit (for example, a special advantageous gaming state, transition to a special Is configured to be given.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a specific numerical value (for example, HP) does not become a specific update result (for example, “0” or less), a predetermined update result (for example, the remaining update result) HP) is held, and in the next predetermined game period, it is configured such that whether or not a specific update result is obtained is drawn with respect to the held predetermined update result.

  By configuring in this way, even if a privilege is not awarded, the result of updating the specific numerical value during the predetermined game period is not wasted, so it is possible to prevent the decrease in the interest of the game. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to shift to a predetermined gaming period (for example, the additional BB) (for example, when any of BB1 to 4 is determined as the internal winning combination), a specific If a preferential condition (for example, that the preferential mode lock flag is on) is satisfied, the preferential condition in which the provision of benefits is preferential is established, and this preferential condition is configured to be maintained until the privilege is provided. ing.

  By configuring in this way, even if a benefit is not given, if the benefit is given in a predetermined game period after the next time, since the preferential state is maintained, the interest of the game decreases. Can be prevented.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is further determined whether or not a specific numerical value (for example, HP) is to be updated based on the number of consecutive winnings for the specific combination (for example, replay role) (for example, a drawing of the HP subtraction value) Is configured to be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific part (for example, the internal winning of “JAC”) is a transition opportunity, for example, during a predetermined special game state (for example, the additional BB), as a transition opportunity. , And the role of replay role is increased (for example, transition to the RT2 gaming state during BB).

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to perform a more diverse lottery with regard to the provision of a predetermined benefit (for example, transition to a special added state that is a special advantageous gaming state).

  As described above, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, game machines according to at least the first to tenth inventions described below can be provided.

[A game machine according to the first invention]
In recent years, referring to the point selection table while the bonus (for example, BB) is activated, the points are integrated by lottery based on the internal winning combination, and the procedure of the stop operation which becomes advantageous for the player after the bonus ends according to the accumulated points. There is known a gaming machine that reports (for example, prior art document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-79698).

  However, in the gaming machine shown in prior art reference 1, since the point indicating whether to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is only determined by the lottery based on the internal winning combination, the bonus There is a problem that the game in operation becomes monotonous.

  The first invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is possible to perform a more diverse lottery regarding lottery of whether to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can

  In the first invention, symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main) for determining an internal winning combination Internal lottery processing by the CPU 93), symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for starting fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, and display on the symbol display means The symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, the reel stop control processing and the reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol being stopped and the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by the symbol fluctuation stop control means is stopped Based on the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, bonus combination) on the symbol display means, the special (For example, special gaming state control means (for example, bonus operation check processing by the main CPU 93 and winning operation command reception processing by the sub CPU 102) to be controlled to normal BB) and procedures of stop operation advantageous for the player are notified Advantage game state control means (for example, sub CPU 102) to control to a certain advantageous game state (for example, ART game), and advantage game state lottery means for lottery whether or not to shift to the specific advantage game state (for example, And the sub-CPU 102), and in the special game state, the special game state lottery means continues a predetermined part (for example, replay part) a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) or more by the internal winning combination determination means. When it is determined, the plurality of types of lottery rights different in the degree of expectation to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state (for example, The lottery right is granted from among V1 to LV7 cards, and it is shifted to a predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ) after the end of the special gaming state, and based on the lottery right granted in the predetermined lottery state It is a gaming machine characterized by lottery whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state.

  In the first invention, the advantageous game state lottery means further provides the lottery right based on an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means in the special gaming state. It is the gaming machine described above.

  Further, in the first invention, in the advantageous game state lottery means, the number (for example, the number of cards) of the lottery right granted in the special game state is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, “8 sheets”) In the case described above, it is determined to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state without shifting to the predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ) after the end of the special gaming state Machine.

  Further, in the first invention, the special gaming state control means determines the internal winning combination based on that a predetermined condition is established in the special gaming state (for example, having been internally won by "JAC"). The specific winning probability state in which the specific winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means from the specific winning combination low probability state (for example, the RT0 gaming state in BB) with a low probability that the specific winning combination is determined by the means. (For example, when in the special gaming state ending when the special gaming state ends by shifting to the RT2 gaming state during BB), the specific winning combination at least in the predetermined lottery state The gaming machine according to the above is characterized in that the probability state is taken over (for example, the RT2 gaming state is set in step S155 of FIG. 69).

  According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention, the lottery which is richer in diversity is performed regarding the lottery whether to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player (for example, the transition lottery to the ART game). It can be carried out.

[A game machine according to the second invention]

  In recent years, referring to the point selection table while the bonus (for example, BB) is activated, the points are integrated by lottery based on the internal winning combination, and the procedure of the stop operation which becomes advantageous for the player after the bonus ends according to the accumulated points. There is known a gaming machine that reports (for example, prior art document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-79698).

  However, in the gaming machine shown in prior art reference 1, since the point indicating whether to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is only determined by the lottery based on the internal winning combination, the bonus There is a problem that the game in operation becomes monotonous.

  Further, in the gaming machine shown in the prior art document 1, the bonus is configured such that its operation is ended when a predetermined number of medals are paid out. Therefore, for example, when it is possible to perform a stop operation so as not to win a predetermined small combination while winning a predetermined small combination during the bonus operation, the number of point lottery is intentionally increased There is a problem in that it becomes possible for the game arcade to suffer from unforeseen disadvantages.

  The second invention is made in view of such a point, and whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player while appropriately balancing the interests of the player and the game arcade An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a more diverse lottery in connection with the lottery.

  In the second invention, symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main) for determining an internal winning combination Internal lottery processing by the CPU 93), symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for starting fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, and display on the symbol display means The symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, the reel stop control processing and the reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol being stopped and the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by the symbol fluctuation stop control means is stopped Based on the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, bonus combination) on the symbol display means, the special (For example, special gaming state control means (for example, bonus operation check processing by the main CPU 93 and winning operation command reception processing by the sub CPU 102) to be controlled to normal BB) and procedures of stop operation advantageous for the player are notified Advantage game state control means (for example, sub CPU 102) to control to a certain advantageous game state (for example, ART game), and advantage game state lottery means for lottery whether or not to shift to the specific advantage game state (for example, , The sub CPU 102), the special game state control means, in the special game state, a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined small combination (for example, "push order small combination" and "RB medium small combination") For example, when the symbol combination of "bell" is displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) on the symbol display means, the special play In the special gaming state, the advantageous game state lottery means ends the state, and the specific winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means during a predetermined lottery period (for example, a period in which the number of lottery times is less than 5). A plurality of lottery rights (for example, LV1 to LV7 cards) having different degrees of expectation for transitioning to the specific advantageous gaming state when (for example, a replay role) is determined continuously a specific number of times (for example, 5 times) or more The lottery right is granted from among the above, and after the end of the special gaming state, it shifts to a predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ), and in the predetermined lottery state, the identification is made based on the lottery right granted. Whether or not to shift to the advantageous gaming state of the lottery, the predetermined lottery period is the number of times the predetermined small winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determination means in the special gaming state Is terminated based on the predetermined number of times, and the predetermined small combination is not displayed on the symbol display means a combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined small combination according to the procedure of the player's stop operation It is a game machine characterized by including a specific small winning combination (for example, "push order small winning combination").

  Further, in the second invention, the advantageous game state lottery means further includes, in the special game state, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means during the predetermined lottery period. A gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that a lottery right is granted.

  Further, in the second invention, in the advantageous game state lottery means, the number (for example, the number of cards) of the lottery right granted in the special game state is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, “8 sheets”) In the case described above, it is determined to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state without shifting to the predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ) after the end of the special gaming state Machine.

  Further, in the second invention, the special gaming state control means determines the internal winning combination based on that a predetermined condition is established in the special gaming state (for example, having been internally won by "JAC"). A game machine as described above, characterized in that the probability that the specific combination is determined by means is increased.

  According to the gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention, the lottery of whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player while appropriately balancing the profits of the player and the game arcade (for example, to the ART game Can make a lot more diverse lottery.

[A game machine according to the third invention]
In recent years, referring to the point selection table while in a predetermined gaming state (for example, during BB operation), points are integrated by lottery based on the internal winning combination, and the player is ended after the predetermined gaming state is ended according to the accumulated points. There is known a gaming machine which determines whether to notify a procedure of a stop operation which is advantageous to the player (for example, prior art document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-79698).

  However, in the gaming machine shown in prior art reference 1, since the above-mentioned points are merely determined by the lottery based on the internal winning combination, it is determined whether to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player. There was a problem that the lottery became monotonous.

  The third invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is possible to perform a more diverse lottery concerning the lottery of whether to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player or not The purpose is to provide a game machine that can

  In the third invention, symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main) for determining an internal winning combination Internal lottery processing by the CPU 93), symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for starting fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, and display on the symbol display means Symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, the reel stop control processing and the reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for stopping the fluctuation of the selected symbol, and a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, the notification of the procedure of the stop operation advantageous for the player) , Advantageous game state control means (for example, sub CPU 102) to control to ART game, and whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous game state Advantageous gaming state lottery means (e.g., sub CPU 102) for drawing a lottery, and the advantageous gaming state lottery means is shifted to the specific advantageous gaming state in a predetermined lottery right giving gaming state (e.g., normal BB) It is possible to grant a plurality of lottery rights out of a plurality of types of lottery rights (for example, LV1 to LV7 cards) having different degrees of expectation, and a predetermined lottery state (for example, an item) after the predetermined lottery right grant gaming state is ended. Move to CZ), draw lottery whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state sequentially based on the plurality of lottery rights granted in the predetermined lottery state, and shift to the specific advantageous gaming state If it is determined that the game is to be made, the lottery right which has not been used in the lottery for determining whether to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state is determined as the excess lottery right, Based on Rino lottery right, I said to plus a number of games particularly advantageous gaming state (e.g., executing a lottery plus ART number game shown in step S567 of FIG. 86) that is a game machine according to claim.

  Further, in the third invention, the advantageous game state lottery means is configured such that the number of the lottery rights (for example, the number of cards) granted in the predetermined lottery right giving gaming state is a predetermined number (for example, “eight”) When it becomes above, the specific transition condition is established, and the number of games in the specific advantageous gaming state is added with the predetermined number or more of the lottery rights as the excess lottery right (for example, FIG. It is a game machine as described above characterized by executing a lottery of the number of added ART games shown in step S544 of 85).

  Also, in the third invention, the advantageous game state lottery means determines the number of games of the specific advantageous game state to be added according to the expected degree of the extra lottery right, and the expected degree is high As described above, the number of games played in the specific advantageous gaming state to be added is increased (for example, it is set as a lottery value defined in the card extra time ART game number lottery table shown in FIG. 48). Is a gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention, the lottery which is richer in diversity is performed regarding the lottery (for example, the transition lottery to the ART game) whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player. It can be carried out.

  Further, according to the gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention, even if a lottery right not used for the lottery occurs in a predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ), the lottery right is useless. In addition, since the number of games played in a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, ART game) is informed that the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player is increased, the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player With regard to the lottery whether or not to notify (for example, the transition lottery to the ART game), it is possible to further enhance the interest.

[A game machine according to the fourth invention]
In recent years, referring to the point selection table while the bonus (for example, BB) is activated, the points are integrated by lottery based on the internal winning combination, and the procedure of the stop operation which becomes advantageous for the player after the bonus ends according to the accumulated points. There is known a gaming machine that reports (for example, prior art document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-79698).

  However, in the gaming machine shown in prior art reference 1, since the point indicating whether to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is only determined by the lottery based on the internal winning combination, the bonus There is a problem that the game in operation becomes monotonous.

  The fourth invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is possible to perform a more diverse lottery regarding the lottery of whether to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player or not The purpose is to provide a game machine that can

  In the fourth invention, symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main) for determining an internal winning combination Internal lottery processing by the CPU 93), symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for starting fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, and display on the symbol display means The symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, the reel stop control processing and the reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol being stopped and the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by the symbol fluctuation stop control means is stopped Based on the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, bonus combination) on the symbol display means, the special (For example, special gaming state control means (for example, bonus operation check processing by the main CPU 93 and winning operation command reception processing by the sub CPU 102) to be controlled to battle CZ) and a procedure of stop operation advantageous for the player are informed Advantage game state control means (for example, sub CPU 102) to control to a certain advantageous game state (for example, ART game), and advantage game state lottery means for lottery whether or not to shift to the specific advantage game state (for example, And sub CPU 102), the advantageous gaming state lottery means determines a character from among a plurality of characters (for example, characters A to C) in the special gaming state, and the predetermined gaming state in the special gaming state. During the lottery period (e.g., a period in which the number of lottery times is less than "5"), A first lottery (for example, a lottery in step S504 of FIG. 84) of whether or not a specific numerical value (for example, HP) is to be updated based on the internal winning combination determined by the Kuta and the internal winning combination determining means. In the special gaming state, based on the number of times the determined character and the specific combination (for example, the replay combination) are determined consecutively (for example, the number of consecutive replays) during the predetermined lottery period. Perform a second lottery (for example, lottery of step S508 in FIG. 84) of whether or not to update the specific numerical value, and in the special game state, as a result of the first lottery and the second lottery, It is a gaming machine characterized by determining to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state when a specific numerical value becomes a specific update result (for example, HP is "0" or less).

  Further, in the fourth invention, the special game state control means is a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined small part (for example, “push order small part” and “RB medium and small part”) in the special game state (for example, for example , When the combination of symbols related to "bell" is displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) on the symbol display means, the special gaming state is ended, and the predetermined lottery period is in the special gaming state The method ends when the number of times the predetermined small winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means becomes the predetermined number, and the predetermined small winning combination is determined according to the procedure of the player's stop operation. A game machine as described above, characterized in that a combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined small combination includes a specific small combination (for example, "push order small combination") not displayed on the symbol display means.

  Further, in the fourth invention, the special gaming state control means determines the internal winning combination based on that a predetermined condition is established in the special gaming state (for example, having been internally elected to “JAC”). A game machine as described above, characterized in that the probability that the specific combination is determined by means is increased.

  According to the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, a lot more diverse lottery is performed regarding the lottery whether to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player (for example, the transition lottery to the ART game). It can be carried out.

[A game machine according to the fifth invention]
In recent years, referring to the point selection table while the bonus (for example, BB) is activated, the points are integrated by lottery based on the internal winning combination, and the procedure of the stop operation which becomes advantageous for the player after the bonus ends according to the accumulated points. There is known a gaming machine that reports (for example, prior art document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-79698).

  However, in the gaming machine shown in prior art reference 1, since the point indicating whether to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is only determined by the lottery based on the internal winning combination, the bonus There is a problem that the game in operation becomes monotonous.

  The fifth invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is possible to perform a more diverse lottery regarding lottery of whether to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can

  In the fifth invention, symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main) for determining an internal winning combination Internal lottery processing by the CPU 93), symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for starting fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, and display on the symbol display means The symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, the reel stop control processing and the reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol being stopped and the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by the symbol fluctuation stop control means is stopped Based on the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, bonus combination) on the symbol display means, the special (For example, special gaming state control means (for example, bonus operation check processing by the main CPU 93 and winning operation command reception processing by the sub CPU 102) to be controlled to battle CZ) and a procedure of stop operation advantageous for the player are informed Advantage game state control means (for example, sub CPU 102) to control to a certain advantageous game state (for example, ART game), and advantage game state lottery means for lottery whether or not to shift to the specific advantage game state (for example, , The sub CPU 102), and the advantageous game state lottery means determines the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means during a predetermined lottery period (for example, a period in which the number of lottery times is less than "5"). A lottery to determine whether or not to update a specific numerical value (for example, HP) based on the winning combination (for example, in step S504 of FIG. 84). And when the specific numerical value is a specific update result (for example, HP is "0" or less) as a result of the lottery, it is determined to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state, and the predetermined Based on the number of times a predetermined small winning combination has been determined by the internal winning combination determination means (for example, the number of times that can be selected) in the lottery period 84, and the predetermined lottery period is a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) in which the predetermined small winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means in the special gaming state. It is a game machine characterized by ending based on having become.

  In the fifth invention, the special game state control means is based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the special game state (for example, the bonus end number counter becomes less than "0"). The special gaming state is determined by the special gaming state control means after the special gaming state is ended and the advantageous gaming state lottery means decides to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state in the special gaming state. Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, until it is ended, it is determined whether or not to add the number of games in the specific advantageous gaming state (for example, determination in step S518 of FIG. 84) It is a game machine as described above characterized by being.

  In the fifth invention, the number of times of the specific advantageous gaming state is added based on the number of times the predetermined small winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means by the advantageous gaming state lottery means. If (for example, the number of added ART games is added by the determination of step S519 in FIG. 84), the game of the specific advantageous gaming state is performed based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means The same display is performed in the case where the number of times is added (for example, when the number of added ART games is added by the determination of step S518 in FIG. 84), the number of times of the particular advantageous gaming state is added The gaming machine according to the above-mentioned, further comprising notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for notifying the user of the event.

  Further, in the fifth invention, in the special game state, the advantageous game state lottery means further includes a specific winning combination (for example, a replay role) by the internal winning combination determining means during the predetermined lottery period. It is a game machine as described above characterized by performing lottery of whether to update the specific numerical value based on the number of times (for example, the number of times of continuous replay) determined.

  According to the gaming machine according to the fifth invention, a lottery richer in variety is made with respect to the lottery (for example, the transition lottery to ART game) whether or not to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player. It can be carried out.

[A game machine according to the sixth invention]
In recent years, based on the internal winning combination, it is determined whether or not control is to be performed to invalidate the operation by the player for a predetermined period (hereinafter referred to as "lock"), and if lock control is performed, There is known a gaming machine which decides whether or not to shift to a gaming state advantageous to a player according to the situation (for example, prior art document 2: JP-A-2009-201820).

  Further, in the gaming machine shown in the prior art document 2, whether it is the RT1 operating state (hereinafter referred to as "replay low probability state") or the RT2 operating state (hereinafter referred to as "replay high probability state"). Accordingly, the type of lock control is determined using different lottery tables.

  By the way, in the gaming machine shown in the prior art reference 2, there may be provided a predetermined lottery state in which it is determined whether or not to shift to a gaming state (for example, ART gaming) advantageous to the player.

  When such a predetermined lottery state is provided, if there is a possibility of transitioning from the replay low probability state to the replay high probability state or from the replay high probability state to the replay low probability state during the predetermined lottery state, the transition is made. It will be necessary to store the lottery table as described above only for the gaming state that is likely to be played.

  That is, when the winning probability of the specific combination (for example, the replay combination) fluctuates during a predetermined lottery state, the number of lottery tables increases, and there is a problem that the storage area is compressed.

  The sixth invention has been made in view of such a point, and in a predetermined lottery state where it is determined whether or not to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player, the winning probability of the specific combination fluctuates An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a proper lottery without pressing a storage area even if there is a possibility.

  In the sixth invention, symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main) for determining an internal winning combination Internal lottery processing by the CPU 93), symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for starting fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, and display on the symbol display means Symbol variation stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process and the reel control process by the main CPU 93) for stopping the variation of the selected symbol, and the specific winning combination (for High probability state (eg, RT2 gaming state) in which the probability of determining “)” is high, and the identification by the internal winning combination determining means And the low probability state (eg, RT0 gaming state or RT1 gaming state) having a low probability that the probability of being determined is the high probability state and the low probability based on that a predetermined transition condition is established. Probability state control means (for example, state management processing by the main CPU 93 and bonus end check processing) which performs transition control between states and a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, the notification of the procedure of stop operation advantageous to the player) Advantageous gaming state control means (for example, sub CPU 102) to control to ART game, and advantageous gaming state lottery means (for example, sub CPU 102) for lottery whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state The advantageous game state lottery means is controlled to either the high probability state or the low probability state by the probability state control means. , A predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ) can be executed, and in the predetermined lottery state, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and a specific lottery table (for example, an item shown in FIG. 49) Whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state is drawn based on the ART drawing table in CZ, and the specific drawing table is determined with high probability in at least the specific part and the low probability state If the predetermined winning combination (for example, "losing") is determined as the internal winning combination, the probability of being decided to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state is specified with the lowest probability (for example, the item shown in FIG. 49) It is a gaming machine characterized by having a lottery value specified in the “other” column in the ART lottery table in CZ.

  According to the gaming machine of the sixth aspect, the lottery table used in a predetermined lottery state (for example, item CZ) in which it is determined whether or not to shift to a gaming state (for example, ART game) advantageous to the player. The number of storage areas can be reduced, and the storage area can be prevented from being compressed.

  Further, according to the gaming machine of the sixth aspect of the present invention, the probability that the player intentionally decides the specific combination (for example, the replay combination) is high probability from the high probability state (for example, the RT2 gaming state) Even if it is shifted to a low probability state (for example, RT0 gaming state or RT1 gaming state) in which the probability that the specific combination is determined is low, it is not possible to receive an advantageous lottery by that, so the game It can be appropriately drawn whether or not to shift to a gaming state (for example, ART gaming) which is advantageous for the player.

  That is, according to the gaming machine according to the sixth aspect of the invention, there is a possibility that the winning probability of the specific winning combination may fluctuate in a predetermined lottery state where it is determined whether or not to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. Even in this case, it is possible to perform a proper lottery without pressing the storage area.

[A game machine according to the seventh invention]
In recent years, during a predetermined game period (for example, battle rendition) in which the main character battles with the enemy character, the action form of the main character is determined, and a specific numerical value (for example, strength points) is determined according to the determined action form. ) And the predetermined result is awarded (for example, causing a specific game) based on the fact that the update result is a specific update result (for example, becoming “0”). (For example, prior art document 3: Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2004-97564).

  However, in the gaming machine shown in prior art reference 3, when a specific numerical value does not become a specific update result in a predetermined game period, the halfway update result is never reflected in the subsequent game. Since this is wasted, there is a problem that the interest of the game after the end of the predetermined game period may be reduced.

  Further, in the gaming machine shown in the prior art reference 3, even when a specific numerical value results in a specific update result, only predetermined benefits are uniformly given. There was a problem of lack of

  The seventh invention is made in view of such a point, and in a predetermined game period, when a specific numerical value is updated and an update result becomes a specific update result, a predetermined privilege is awarded. In the gaming machine, even if the update result is not a specific update result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game, and to perform a more diverse lottery with regard to the awarding of benefits. It aims at providing a game machine.

  In the seventh invention, symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main) for determining an internal winning combination Internal lottery processing by the CPU 93), symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for starting fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, and display on the symbol display means A predetermined advantageous gaming state (e.g., a symbol change stop control means (e.g., a reel stop control process and a reel control process by the main CPU 93) for stopping the change of the selected symbol and a predetermined transition condition being established. Advantageous game state control means (for example, bonus operation check processing by the main CPU 93) and sub CPU 10 to control the addition BB) Bonus awarding process (at the time of receiving a prize operation command) and bonus awarding lottery means (eg, sub CPU 102) for lottery whether or not to grant a predetermined bonus (for example, transition to a special additional state); When it is determined that a predetermined benefit is to be granted (for example, whether or not the preferential mode lock flag is turned on), the preferential decision means (for example, sub CPU 102), and in the predetermined advantageous gaming state, the bonus award lottery means updates a specific numerical value (for example, HP) based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. (Eg, the lottery in step S 473 of FIG. 82), and as a result of the lottery, the specific numerical value is specified before the predetermined advantageous gaming state ends. When the update result (for example, HP is “0” or less), the predetermined benefit is awarded while the specific advantageous value is not the specific update result, but the predetermined advantageous gaming state is ended. If the predetermined update result (for example, remaining HP) which is the update result in the middle is held and the predetermined update result is held, it is determined by the internal winning combination determination means in the predetermined advantageous gaming state Whether or not the specific update result is obtained is randomly drawn from the predetermined update result on the basis of the internal winning combination, and the preferential treatment determination means determines the specific transition condition when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. If the preferential condition of is established (for example, if the preferential mode lock flag is on), the benefit to be provided by the predetermined benefit is increased until the predetermined benefit is provided by the benefit applying means. Decision It is a game machine characterized by being fixed.

  In the seventh invention, the special game state control means is based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the special game state (for example, the bonus end number counter becomes less than "0"). The special game state is ended, and the advantageous game state lottery means until the special game state is ended by the special game state control means after the specific transition condition is established in the special game state. , Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, it is determined whether or not to add the number of games of the specific advantageous gaming state (for example, determined in step S518 of FIG. 84) It is the gaming machine described above.

  In the seventh invention, the advantageous game control means stops the fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means by the symbol fluctuation stop control means, and the combination of the first symbols (for example, according to the same color bonus) Based on the symbol combination displayed on the symbol display unit, control is made to the first advantageous gaming state, and the variation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display unit is stopped by the symbol fluctuation stop control unit, The second advantageous game state is controlled based on the display of the second symbol combination (for example, the combination of symbols relating to different color bonus) on the symbol display means, and the preferential treatment determination means changes the symbol variation The above-mentioned specific preferential condition is established on the basis of being controlled to the first advantageous gaming state by the stop control means (for example, being internally elected to the same color bonus) It is a gaming machine placement.

  In the seventh invention, the bonus award lottery means further includes the number of times the specific winning combination (for example, replay combination) is determined continuously by the internal winning combination determining means in the predetermined advantageous gaming state (for example, for example The gaming machine according to the above-mentioned, wherein a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the specific numerical value is to be updated, based on the number of times of continuous replay.

  According to the gaming machine of the seventh invention, in a predetermined gaming period (for example, the additional BB), a specific numerical value (for example, HP) is updated, and the update result is a specific update result (for example, HP is “0 In the case of a gaming machine that grants a predetermined benefit (for example, transition to a special additional state) when it is less than or equal to), the amusement of the game decreases even if the update result is not a specific update result. Can be used to create a more diverse lottery on the provision of benefits.

[A game machine according to the eighth invention]
In recent years, when a specific small winning combination with a relatively low probability of winning, which is referred to as a so-called “rare role,” is determined as the internal winning role, a specific advantage is notified that the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified. There is known a gaming machine on which the number of times of gaming in the gaming state (for example, the number of ART games) is added (for example, prior art reference 4: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-220271).

  By the way, in the gaming machine shown in prior art reference 4, when the probability of winning is relatively high, and the normal small winning combination for increasing the medal in a specific advantageous gaming state is determined as the internal winning combination, the specific advantage The number of games in the gaming state is not to be added.

  In addition, generally from the viewpoint of maintaining a proper payout rate, in the gaming machine as shown in the prior art document 4, the above-mentioned specific small winning combination is set to have a very low winning probability. There are many.

  Therefore, there are many cases where the specific advantageous gaming state ends without the specific small winning combination mentioned above being determined as the internal winning combination even once, in such a case, the player plays the game in the specific advantageous gaming state There is a problem that it is not possible to have the expectation of the addition of the number, and there is a possibility that the interest of the game may be reduced.

  The eighth invention is made in view of such a point, and in the advantageous gaming state in which the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is informed, the number of times of playing is not made even if a specific small combination is won. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a feeling of expectation of addition.

  In the eighth invention, symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main) for determining an internal winning combination Internal lottery processing by the CPU 93), symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for starting fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, and display on the symbol display means Symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, the reel stop control processing and the reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for stopping the fluctuation of the selected symbol, and a specific advantageous gaming state (for example, the notification of the procedure of the stop operation advantageous for the player) , ART game) to control the advantageous game state control means (for example, sub CPU 102), the number of games of the specific advantageous game state is raised An additional lottery means (e.g., sub CPU 102) for lottery whether or not to perform a predetermined small winning combination (e.g., when it is determined that the additional lottery means is controlled to the specific advantageous gaming state) Determine the number of specific winnings (for example, the number of bell winnings) of the pushing order small winning combination, and in the specific advantageous gaming state, the number of winnings of the predetermined small winning combination becomes the determined number of specific winnings Based on the number of games in the particular advantageous gaming state to be added or not (for example, perform a lottery shown in step S624 in FIG. 88), the predetermined small combination, the procedure of the stop operation is It is a gaming machine characterized by being a small role to be notified.

  Further, in the eighth invention, the additional lottery means is configured to select the specific winning combination based on the fact that the predetermined small winning combination has reached the determined specific winning number in the specific advantageous gaming state. When it is randomly selected whether or not the number of games in the advantageous gaming state is to be added, the number of specific winnings is determined again (for example, the drawing shown in step S627 of FIG. 88 is performed) Machine.

  Further, in the eighth invention, the additional lottery means further determines, in the specific advantageous gaming state, the number of times of the specific advantageous gaming state based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means. Whether or not to add an additional prize is selected, and the specific winning combination different from the predetermined small winning combination (eg, “chance 1” and “chance 2”) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means In the case where the predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the probability that it is determined that the number of times of the specific advantageous gaming condition is to be added is the specific advantageous gaming condition The probability that the specific winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining unit is higher than the probability that it is determined to add the number of games played by the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining unit. Small combination of a gaming machine according to above, wherein the lower than the probability that is determined as an internal winning combination.

  According to the gaming machine of the eighth aspect, in the advantageous gaming state (for example, the ART game) in which the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous for the player is informed (for example, so-called "ra") Even if the player does not win the game, he can give an expectation of the addition of the number of games (for example, the number of ART games).

[A game machine according to the ninth invention]
In recent years, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a period in which a bonus has not been internally won, a ceiling flag is turned on, and a bonus game which is won when the ceiling flag is on is made a more advantageous bonus game, a so-called ceiling A gaming machine having a function is known (for example, prior art document 5: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-215990).

  Further, in such a gaming machine, when a bonus is internally won, it is common that a prophetic effect that suggests an internal bonus of bonus is executed over a plurality of games until the bonus is won.

  By the way, in such a gaming machine, for example, if the bonus is internally won immediately before the predetermined condition is satisfied, the progic effect will be started immediately before the predetermined condition is satisfied. In such a case, there is a possibility that the start of the admonition effect, which should originally increase the player's sense of expectation, may disappoint the player.

  That is, in such a gaming machine, there is a problem that the player may not be able to fully enjoy the entertainment effect of the precursor effect.

  The ninth invention is made in view of such a point, and provides a gaming machine which allows a player to fully enjoy the prosperous effect of the admonition effect even in the case of having a ceiling function. With the goal.

  The ninth invention is a symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main) for determining an internal winning combination. Internal lottery processing by the CPU 93), symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for starting fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, and display on the symbol display means The symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, the reel stop control processing and the reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol being stopped and the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by the symbol fluctuation stop control means is stopped Based on the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, bonus combination) on the symbol display means, the special (For example, special gaming state control means for controlling battle CZ or normal BB) (for example, a bonus operation check process by the main CPU 93 and a winning operation command reception process by the sub CPU 102) and the internal winning combination determination means When the special winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the precursor game determination means for determining the precursor game number (for example, determination of step S592 in FIG. 87) and the precursor game determined by the precursor game number determination means An effect executing means for performing continuous effect based on the number and notifying that the special winning combination has been determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the final game of the continuous effect; The liquid crystal display device 11) and the number of games after the end of the special game state, the number of ceiling games (for example, "5 Determining means (for example, the determination of step S604 in FIG. 87), and the special game state control means determines that the number of ceiling games has been reached by the determination means When it is determined, the special gaming state is controlled to the first special gaming state (for example, battle CZ), and when it is determined that the number of ceiling games has not been reached by the determination means, the special The gaming state is controlled to a second special gaming state (for example, normal BB), and the determination means notifies that the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the notifying means after the end of the special gaming state It is a game machine characterized by judging whether it has reached the number of ceiling games based on the number of games until it is played.

  The ninth invention further includes mode determining means (for example, a lottery in step S 607 in FIG. 87) for determining a mode from a plurality of modes based on whether or not a predetermined transition condition is established. In the game in which the special winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining unit, the special gaming state control unit determines that the mode determined by the mode determining unit is a specific mode (for example, battle mode) In this case, the gaming machine according to the above is characterized in that the special gaming state is controlled to the first special gaming state regardless of the determination result by the determination means.

  In the ninth invention, in the game until the mode determining means is notified that the special winning combination has been determined as the internal winning combination by the effect executing means, the first transition probability (for example, FIG. Whether to shift to the specific mode is determined based on the probability based on the lottery value defined in the normal medium mode transition lottery table shown in 59, and the special combination is made as the internal winning combination by the effect executing means In the game after being notified that the determination has been made, the specific mode based on the second transition probability that is lower in the probability that it is determined to shift to the specific mode than the first transition probability. It is determined whether or not to shift to the game machine described above.

  The ninth invention further comprises advantageous game state control means (e.g., sub CPU 102) for controlling to a specific advantageous game state (e.g., ART game) in which the procedure of the stop operation advantageous for the player is informed. The first special gaming state is a gaming state in which a lottery is performed to determine whether to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state, and whether or not the second special gaming state is transitioned to the specific advantageous gaming state The gaming machine according to the above is characterized in that it is a gaming state in which a lottery of a lottery right (for example, a card) is to be performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, even in the case of having the ceiling function, the player can fully enjoy the protagonistic effects.

[A game machine according to the tenth invention]
BACKGROUND In recent years, gaming machines have been known in which a predetermined benefit is given based on the fact that a replay player has won a predetermined number of times consecutively (for example, prior art document 6: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-51510).

  Also, in recent years, when a specific replay is won, it is determined whether or not control by a player to invalidate the operation for a predetermined period (hereinafter referred to as "lock") is performed, and lock control is performed. There is known a gaming machine to which a predetermined benefit is given (e.g., prior art document 2: JP2009-201820A).

  By the way, for example, in the gaming machine shown in the prior art document 6, it may be considered to perform effects such as disabling the operation by the player for a predetermined period by performing the lock control as shown in the prior art document 2 .

  However, in such a configuration, it is determined whether lock control is to be performed or not according to the number of successive winnings each time the replay player wins, and there is a problem that the control load is significantly increased. The

  The tenth invention is made in view of such a point, and in the gaming machine which grants a privilege based on the fact that the specific part has won continuously, to increase the control burden concerning the grant of the privilege SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of performing an effect of invalidating an operation by a player for a predetermined period.

  In the tenth invention, symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and an internal winning combination determining means (for example, main) for determining an internal winning combination Internal lottery processing by the CPU 93), symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing and reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for starting fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, and display on the symbol display means The symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, the reel stop control processing and the reel control processing by the main CPU 93) for stopping the fluctuation of the symbol being stopped and the fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means by the symbol fluctuation stop control means is stopped Based on the combination of the symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, the replay combination) being displayed on the symbol display means, the next game After the combination of symbols corresponding to the specific part is displayed on the re-game operating means (for example, the bonus operation check process and the medal acceptance / start check process by the main CPU 93) for activating the re-game and the symbol display means Replay operation waiting time setting for setting a replay operation waiting time (for example, replay operation recognition time) for activating the replay before the symbol fluctuation start control means can start the fluctuation of the symbol A privilege providing a predetermined benefit based on a means (for example, the process of step S53 in FIG. 65) and the number of times the specific combination is determined consecutively by the internal winning combination determination means (for example, the number of consecutive replays) Providing means (e.g., sub CPU 102), and the re-play operation waiting time setting means is configured by the internal winning combination determining means A game machine, characterized in that the serial specific combination is set to the replay operation waiting time corresponding to the number determined in succession.

  The tenth invention is an advantageous game state control means (for example, the sub CPU 102) for controlling to a specific advantageous game state (for example, ART game) in which the procedure of the stop operation advantageous for the player is informed. The information processing apparatus further comprises notification means (for example, a speaker) for notifying that the replay is activated by the game actuation means, and the notification means is configured to perform the replay operation by the replay actuation means during the replay action waiting time. It is possible to notify that the game is activated (for example, it is possible to output an automatic input sound), and the privilege giving means is the number of times the specific combination is determined continuously by the internal winning combination determining means. On the basis thereof, a lottery right (for example, a card) for giving a lottery for deciding whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state is given as the predetermined benefit. It is a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine according to these inventions, it is possible to perform an effect (for example, a lock effect) in which the operation by the player is invalidated for a predetermined period without increasing the control load.

  In the tenth invention, the fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol fluctuation stop control means, and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, bonus combination) is the symbol display means The special game state control means (for example, the bonus operation check process by the main CPU 93, and the process at the time of receiving the prize operation command by the sub CPU 102) is controlled based on the displayed, to the special game state (for example, normal BB) The special gaming state control means is determined by the internal winning combination determining means based on that the transition winning combination (for example, RB in BB) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means in the special gaming state. It is made to shift to a specific role high probability state (for example, BB during RT2 gaming state) where the probability that the specific role is determined is high, the specific role high In the rate state, the fluctuation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol fluctuation stop control means, and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the transfer combination is displayed on the symbol display means. Transition to a specific combination low probability state (for example, BB in RB gaming state) in which the probability that the specific combination is determined by the internal winning combination determination means is low (for example, BB in RB gaming state) The predetermined benefit is awarded when the number of times the specific combination is determined consecutively by the determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 5 times), and the re-play activation waiting time setting means determines the internal winning If the number of times the specific combination is determined consecutively by the combination determining means is less than the predetermined number, the first replaying operation waiting time (for example, the value of the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer and “270”), and if the number of times the specific combination is determined consecutively by the internal winning combination determination means is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, it is longer than the first replaying operation waiting time The second replaying operation waiting time (for example, “540” is set as the value of the automatic insertion interval waiting time timer, and is displayed on the symbol display means by the symbol fluctuation stop control means in the specific winning combination probability state. The variation of the symbol is stopped, and based on the combination of the symbols corresponding to the transition combination being displayed on the symbol display means, a specific time (for example, a lock) shorter than the first replaying operation waiting time The game described above, further comprising lock control means (for example, lock execution processing at the end of the game by the main CPU 93) as a timer value "268"). Machine.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the special gaming state (for example, normal BB), in the effect (for example, the lock effect) of invalidating the operation by the player for a predetermined period that the predetermined benefit is difficult to be provided The player can be made aware of the execution time.

  According to the gaming machine according to the tenth aspect of the present invention, there is provided, in the gaming machine for providing a benefit based on the fact that the specific player (for example, the replay player) has won continuously, without increasing the control burden regarding the provision of the benefit An effect (for example, a lock effect) can be performed to invalidate the operation by the player for a predetermined period.

  As mentioned above, although this invention was demonstrated using this embodiment, this invention is not limited to this. That is, the specific configuration of each means included in the present invention is not limited to the example adopted in the above-described embodiment, and any modification is possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display window 4 are adopted as the symbol display means, but instead of or in addition to this, a liquid crystal display device may be used. That is, the image of the symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device may be variably displayed. Further, the display window 4 is configured as a plurality of display windows 4L, 4C, 4R corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are arranged on the circumferential surfaces of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. A part of the symbol may be displayed.

  Further, for example, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 acquires the random number value generated by the random number generator 98 as the internal winning combination determining means and performs the internal lottery process, but instead of this, or At the same time, a random number generation circuit (not shown) incorporated in the main CPU 93 may be used to obtain random number values.

  Further, for example, in the present embodiment, as the start operation detection means for detecting the start operation of the player, the start switch 79 for detecting the operation on the start lever 23 is adopted, and the stop operation for detecting the stop operation of the player Although the stop switch substrate 80 for detecting the operation to the stop button 19L, 19C, 19R is employed as the detection means, a touch panel switch may be used instead of or in addition to this.

  Furthermore, for example, various counters and various timers managed by the control of the main CPU 93 or the sub CPU 102 shown in the present embodiment may be appropriately changed in the management mode within the scope of the present invention. Can. For example, various counters and various timers managed by "addition" may be managed by "subtraction", and in this case, the determination as to "is above" is "below". The determination as to whether or not the condition is “over” is read as the determination as to whether or not the condition is “less than”. Also, for example, various counters and various timers managed by "subtraction" may be managed by "addition", and in this case, the determination as to "is less than or equal to" may be " The judgment as to whether or not the above is replaced with the judgment as to whether or not the term is "less than", and the judgment as to whether or not "less than" is referred to as the judgment as to whether or not as "more than".

  Further, for example, various counters and various timers managed under the control of the main CPU 93 shown in the present embodiment may be managed under the control of the sub CPU 102 without departing from the scope of the present invention. The various counters and the various timers managed by the control of the sub CPU 102 may be managed by the control of the main CPU 93 without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  Further, for example, various gaming states managed by the control of the main CPU 93 shown in the present embodiment may be managed by the control of the sub CPU 102 without departing from the scope of the present invention, and the sub CPU 102 The various gaming states managed by the control of the above may be managed by the control of the main CPU 93 without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  All the inventions described in the present embodiment can be applied to pachinko machines, gaming machines, slot machines and all other gaming machines without departing from the scope of the invention.

1 Pachi-slot machine 3L, 3C, 3R Reel 4 Display window (symbol display area)
23 Start lever 19L, 19C, 19R Stop button 91 Main control circuit 101 Secondary control circuit 93 Main CPU
95 Main RAM
101 sub CPU
103 Sub RAM

Claims (4)

Symbol display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns;
Internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination;
Design fluctuation start control means for starting fluctuation of a symbol displayed on the symbol display means;
Symbol fluctuation stop control means for stopping fluctuation of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means;
The variation of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means is stopped by the symbol variation stop control means, and the special game state is controlled based on the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special part being displayed on the symbol display means Special gaming state control means,
Advantageous game state control means for controlling to a specific advantageous game state in which a procedure of stop operation advantageous to the player is informed;
Advantageous gaming state lottery means for lottery whether or not to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state;
The advantageous game state lottery means
In the special gaming state, during a predetermined lottery period, the lottery of whether or not to update a specific numerical value is performed based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means,
As a result of the lottery, when the specific numerical value becomes a specific update result, it is determined to shift to the specific advantageous gaming state, and the predetermined winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means in the predetermined lottery period. Based on the number of times the game is determined, it is determined whether or not to add the number of games of the particular advantageous gaming state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined lottery period is ended based on the fact that the number of times the predetermined small winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means in the special gaming state has become a predetermined number. The special gaming state control means ends the special gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined ending condition in the special gaming state.
The internal game of winning the advantageous game state lottery means until the special game state is ended by the special game state control means after it is decided to shift to the specific advantageous game state in the special game state The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein it is determined whether to add the number of times of the particular advantageous gaming state on the basis of the internal winning combination determined by the determining means.   When the number of games of the specific advantageous gaming state is added based on the number of times the predetermined small winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means by the advantageous gaming state lottery means, the internal winning combination is determined In the case where the number of games in the specific advantageous gaming state is added based on the internal winning combination determined by the means, the same display is performed and the number of games in the specific advantageous gaming state is added The gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising notification means for notifying. In the special game state, the advantageous game state lottery means further performs the specific numerical value based on the number of times the specific winning combination is determined continuously by the internal winning combination determining means during the predetermined lottery period. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein a lottery to determine whether or not to renew is performed.

Images